Ma en

en Operator's manual
Crawler dozer
PR 734-1481
PR 734-1482
PR 734-1659
From serial number 13743
Document ID
ORIGINAL OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Order number: 9087118
Issued: 01.10.2016
Version: 05
Author: LWT / Technical Documentation Department
Product ID
Manufacturer: Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH
Type: PR 734
Type no.: 1481, 1482, 1659
From Serial no.: 13743
Contact Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH

Hans Liebherr-Straße 35
A – 6410 Telfs
Machine data:
Enter the following information on taking delivery. *You will find the information on the
type plate of the machine. This will also be useful when you order spares.
* Vehicle ID number:
VAUZ ............................. ZT .............................
* Year of manufacture:
.............................
Commissioning date:
.................. / ................. / .................
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
2 PR734-1481 / 13743
Foreword
These operating instructions have been written for the machine operator and for
the maintenance personnel of the machine.
It contains the descriptions for:
– Chapter 1 “Product description”
– Chapter 2 “Safety guidelines”
– Chapter 3 “Control, operation”
– Chapter 4 “Malfunctions”
– Chapter 5 “Maintenance”
The operating instructions must be read and used carefully by all persons who
carry out work with or on the machine before putting the machine into service for
the first time and later, at regular intervals.
Work with or on the machine includes, for example:
– Operation including set up, troubleshooting during work procedure, disposal of
production wastes, care, disposal of service and auxiliary materials.
– Service, including maintenance, inspection and repair work
– Transport or loading the machine
This allows the machine operator to familiarize himself with the machine more
easily and prevent malfunctions due to improper operation.
Observation of the operating instructions by maintenance personnel:
– increases reliability in use
– extends the service life of your machine
– reduces repair costs and downtime
The operating instructions belong with the machine. Make sure that a copy is
always readily available in the compartment in the operator's cab.
The Operating instructions should be supplemented with instructions for accident
prevention and environmental protection based on existing national regulations.
In addition to the operating instructions and legally binding regulations on accident
prevention which apply in the user country and at point of use, authorized specialist
rules for safe and correct working procedures are also to be observed.
These operating instructions contain all required information for control, operation
and maintenance of your machine.
Some illustrations in these operating instructions may depict details and working
devices which differ to your machine.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
In some illustrations, protective devices and covers have been removed in the
interests of better presentation.
Improvements, which are always being incorporated into our machines, may result
in changes to your machine which are not yet indicated in these operating instruc-
tions.
If you need additional explanations or instructions, please don't hesitate to contact
the Technical Documentation and Service Department.
Under extreme conditions, more frequent maintenance than specified in the
inspection checklist may be required.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 3
Foreword Operator's manual
Liability and warranty

Due to the variety of products offered by other manufacturers (for example service
items, lubricants, attachments and spare parts), Liebherr cannot check the suita-
bility and error-free function of third party products in or on Liebherr products in
general. The same applies for possible interactions of third party products with
Liebherr products.
The use of this party products in or on Liebherr machines is at the discretion of the
user. Liebherr denies any warranty or liability for damages of any kind for failures
or damages on Liebherr machines, which were caused by use of third party prod-
ucts.
In addition, Liebherr will not approve any warranty claims, which occurred due
improper operation, insufficient maintenance or non-observation of safety guide-
lines.
Modifications, conditions, copyright

– We reserve the right to make changes of technical details on the machine in
comparison to the information and illustrations in this manual.
– The warranty and liability conditions of Liebherr’s general business conditions
will not be expanded by the above information.
– The information and illustrations contained in these operating instructions may
neither be copied and distributed, nor used for the purposes of competition. All
rights are expressly reserved in accordance with copyright laws.
– Machine data: Component relevant machine data is recorded in part by the
system. The saved data is used by the manufacturer for continued improvement
of function and reliability.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
4 PR734-1481 / 13743
Reply form
We need your help to continually improve our documentation. Please copy this
page and fax it or e-mail it to us with your comments, ideas and suggestions for
improvement.
To: Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH

Hans Liebherr Straße 35
A-6410 Telfs / Österreich
Fax: 0043 50809 6 7708
E-mail: info.lwt@liebherr.com
Ideas, comments (please state the page number):
Overall, how would you judge this document?
Excellent
Very good
Good
Satisfactory
Poor
Your data: Machine / serial number:

Company:
Last name:
Address:
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Telephone number:
Dealer:
Thank you for your help.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 5
Reply form Operator's manual
Notes:
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
6 PR734-1481 / 13743
Contents
1 Product description 15
1.1 Technical description 15
1.1.1 Design overview 15
1.2 Technical data 17
1.2.1 Information for vibration emission 17
1.2.2 Sound emission 18
1.2.3 Maximum operating weight 18
1.3 Tightening torques 19
1.3.1 Tightening torques for hex head screws 19
1.3.2 Tightening torques for countersunk screws 21
1.3.3 Tightening torque for cutting edges, end bits and adapters 23
2 Safety guidelines, signs 25

2.1 Designation of warning notes 25
2.1.1 Additional designations 26
2.1.2 Additional rules and guidelines 26
2.2 Destined use 26
2.3 Signs on the machine 26
2.3.1 Safety signs 27
2.3.2 Reference signs 32
2.3.3 Type plates 39
2.4 Safety guidelines 40
2.4.1 General safety instructions 40
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
2.4.2 Safety guidelines for crushing and burn prevention 41

2.4.3 Safety guidelines for fire and explosion prevention 41
2.4.4 Safety guidelines for machine start up 42
2.4.5 Safety guidelines for start up 42
2.4.6 Safety guidelines for working 43
2.4.7 Safety guidelines for turning the machine off 44

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 7
Contents Operator's manual
2.4.8 Safety guidelines for transporting the machine 44

2.4.9 Safety guidelines for towing the machine 45
2.4.10 Safety guidelines for maintenance 45
2.4.11 Safety guidelines for welding work on the machine 48
2.4.12 Safety guidelines for working on the attachment 48
2.4.13 Safety guidelines for loading the machine with a crane 48
2.4.14 Safety notes for maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines 48
2.4.15 Safety guidelines for maintenance work on machines with hydro accu-
mulators 49
2.4.16 Roll over protection (ROPS) and falling object protection (FOPS) 50
2.4.17 Equipment and attachment parts 50
2.4.18 Protection from vibrations 50
2.4.19 See and be seen 51
3 Control, operation 53
3.1 Operating and control elements 54
3.1.1 Operator's cab 54
3.1.2 Control elements on the operator's platform 56
3.1.3 Control elements on the operator's platform 62
3.1.4 Display Hydraulic oil temperature 66
3.1.5 Hydraulic oil level indicator 67
3.2 Operation 68
3.2.1 Entry 68
3.2.2 Emergency exit 68
3.2.3 Door lock 69
3.2.4 Operator's seat with mechanic suspension 71
3.2.5 Operator's seat with pneumatic suspension 73
3.2.6 Seatbelt 76
3.2.7 Armrests 78
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
3.2.8 Heater, ventilation 78

3.2.9 Air conditioning system 80
3.2.10 Sliding window 82
3.2.11 Interior cab lighting and reading light 83
3.2.12 Inside mirror 83
3.2.13 Electrical window wiper and window washer system 84

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
8 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Contents
3.2.14 Compartment for documentation 85

3.2.15 Back up warning device 86
3.2.16 Fire extinguisher 87
3.2.17 Rotating beacon 87
3.2.18 LiDAT 87
3.3 Operation 88
3.3.1 Operate the machine daily 88
3.3.2 Use of the machine in low or high ambient temperatures 95
3.3.3 Start the Diesel engine 96
3.3.4 Travel operation 101
3.3.5 Travel 107
3.3.6 Braking 109
3.3.7 Take the machine out of service 111
3.3.8 Working in water 116
3.3.9 Working with the attachment 117
3.3.10 Work with optional equipment 123
3.4 Work methods 125
3.4.1 Grading 125
3.4.2 Fine grading 126
3.4.3 Using several machines simultaneously 127
3.4.4 Making ditches 128
3.4.5 Land clearing 128
3.4.6 Ripping 130
3.5 Install and remove the attachment 132
3.5.1 Installation guidelines for installation and removal of attachment parts 132
3.5.2 Install the bearing shells of the attachment 132
3.5.3 Install and remove the push frame with the straight blade 134
3.6 Transport 142
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
3.6.1 Transport the machine by truck or rail 142

3.6.2 Load the machine with the crane 145
3.7 Emergency operations 149
3.7.1 Function of emergency operation 149
3.7.2 Tow the machine 149
3.7.3 Jump start procedure 157

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 9
4 Operating problems 159

4.1 Problems - Cause - Remedy 160
4.1.1 Diesel engine 160
4.1.2 Hydraulic system 163
4.1.3 Travel gear, tracks 163
4.1.4 Electrical system 163
4.1.5 Heating system 164
4.1.6 Working equipment 164
4.2 Problem remedy 165
4.2.1 Change the fuses 165
5 Maintenance 171
5.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule 171
5.2 Fill quantities, lubrication schedule 176
5.2.1 Recommended lubricants 176
5.2.2 Recommended service items 177
5.2.3 Lubrication schedule 177
5.2.4 Lubrication chart symbols 179
5.3 Lubricants and fuels 180
5.3.1 General data 180
5.3.2 Diesel fuels 180
5.3.3 Lubricating oils for Diesel engines 181
5.3.4 Coolant for Diesel engines 183
5.3.5 Hydraulic oil 186
5.3.6 Lube oils for splitterboxes 191
5.3.7 Lube oils for travel gear 192
5.3.8 Oil for duo cone (slipring) seal Travel gear 193
5.3.9 Oil for axle bearing 193
5.3.10 Grease and other lubricants
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
193
5.3.11 Oil for hinges and joints 195
5.4 Take oil samples 196
5.4.1 Taking oil samples and oil analysis 196
5.5 Preparatory maintenance tasks 200
5.5.1 Safety instructions for maintenance 200
5.5.2 Maintenance position 200

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
10 PR734-1481 / 13743
5.5.3 Turn the electrical system off 204

5.5.4 Lift the operator's cab 204
5.5.5 Lower the operator's cab 206
5.5.6 Lift the operator's cab hydraulically 207
5.5.7 Lower the operator's cab hydraulically 209
5.6 Overall machine 212
5.6.1 Lubricating the working attachment and hoist cylinder bearing 212
5.6.2 Check the windshield wiper 213
5.7 Diesel engine 214
5.7.1 Check the engine oil level 214
5.7.2 Change the engine oil 215
5.7.3 Change the lube oil filter 217
5.7.4 Diesel engine: Check the arrangement and belly pans for contamination
and clean 217
5.7.5 Check and change the V-belt 218
5.7.6 Check the Diesel engine arrangement for leaks and condition 219
5.7.7 Check the supply and exhaust lines for mounting and leaks 220
5.7.8 Change the oil separator filter insert 221
5.7.9 Check the electrical system of the Diesel engine 222
5.7.10 Diesel engine: Check all sensors and cable connections for tight
seating and condition 222
5.7.11 Check the vibration damper 223
5.7.12 Check the engine mount, oil pan and engine brackets 223
5.8 Cooling system 224
5.8.1 Check the coolant level 224
5.8.2 Add coolant 224
5.8.3 Check the cooling system 226
5.8.4 Check the antifreeze concentration in the coolant 226
5.8.5 Change the coolant 231
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
5.9 Fuel system 234

5.9.1 Notes for work on the fuel system 234
5.9.2 Drain the fuel filter condensation 234
5.9.3 Change fuel filter cartridges 235
5.9.4 Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank 238
5.9.5 Empty and clean the fuel tank 239
5.9.6 Bleed the fuel filter and the fuel system 242

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 11
5.9.7 Drain the fuel water separator condensation 246

5.9.8 Clean the fuel water separator 247
5.10 Air filter system 248
5.10.1 Replacing the air filter 248
5.11 Hydraulic system 251
5.11.1 Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank and add oil 251
5.11.2 Clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank 253
5.11.3 Change the return filter insert 255
5.11.4 Change the replenishing circuit filter 257
5.11.5 Check the hydraulic system for function and leaks 258
5.11.6 Clean the oil cooler 258
5.11.7 Change the hydraulic oil 259
5.11.8 Drain water and sediments in the hydraulic tank 261
5.12 Splitterbox 262
5.12.1 Check the oil level 262
5.12.2 Change the gear oil 262
5.13 Electrical system 265
5.13.1 Check indicator lights and lighting 265
5.13.2 Check the batteries 265
5.13.3 Change the light bulbs 267
5.14 Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system 269
5.14.1 Check the heater for function and leaks 269
5.14.2 Clean and change the heater - fresh air filter 270
5.14.3 Air conditioning system 270
5.14.4 Check and clean the drain valves 273
5.15 Drive gear 277
5.15.1 Check condition of travel gear 277
5.15.2 Check the oil level 277
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
5.15.3 Change the oil 278

5.15.4 Travel gear - Duo cone (slipring) seal area 279
5.16 Track components 288
5.16.1 Checking the nuts and bolts of the travel gear components are firmly
seated 288
5.16.2 Check and adjust the idler guides 289
5.16.3 Check and adjust the chain tension 293

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
12 PR734-1481 / 13743
5.16.4 Change the chain 296

5.16.5 Check the oil quantity in the axle bearing 302
5.16.6 Lubricate the equalizer bar bearing 303
5.17 Working attachment 304
5.17.1 Check the cutting edges, end bits and ripper tips for wear 304
5.17.2 Check the center position and mounting 304
5.17.3 Check the mounting screws and bolt retainers of the attachment for
tight seating 304
5.17.4 Ripper Remove and install the tooth tips 304
5.18 Cleaning the machine 306
5.18.1 Wet cleaning the machine 306
5.19 Preservation tasks 308
5.19.1 Protect the piston rods 308
5.19.2 Taking the machine out of service 308
Index 309
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 13
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
14 PR734-1481 / 13743
1 Product description
1.1 Technical description
1.1.1 Design overview

This section comprises an overview of the machine and descriptions of the compo-
nents shown.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 1: Overall machine - front view

1 Blade 5 Travel gear 9 Hydraulic tank
2 Strut 6 Hoist cylinder 10 Central electric compartment
3 Push frame 7 Engine compartment door left
4 Track 8 Operator's cab

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 15
Product description Operator's manual
Technical description
Fig. 2: Overall view - rear view

15 Ripper (Optional equipment) 18 Idler 21 Diesel engine with pump
installation
16 Fuel tank 19 Oil tank - slipring area 22 Tilt cylinder
17 Battery compartment 20 Engine compartment door
right
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
16 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Product description
Technical data
1.2 Technical data
The most important technical data can be found in the following enclosed brochure.
1.2.1 Information for vibration emission
Hand, arm and whole body vibration emission

The operator's seat installed in this machine by the manufacturer meets ISO
7096:2000, EM3 for telescopic handlers, EM6 for crawlers. When replacing the
seat, make sure that the new seat also meets this standard.
Hand - arm vibrations

When using the machine as it was intended, the weighted (frequency valued) effec-
tive value of the hand - arm vibrations according to ISO 5349-1:2001 is below 2.5
m/s2.
Whole body vibrations

When using the machine as intended, weighted (frequency valued) effective values
for certain application examples of the machine can be provided according to the
below listed chart. These values meet the data of the Technical Report ISO/TR
25398:2006 “Earth-moving machinery - Guidelines for assessment of exposure to
whole-body vibration of ride-on machines - Use of harmonized data measured by
international institutes, organizations and manufacturers”. The test procedure used
in that case meets ISO 2631-1:1997. The listed effective values of represented
machines are noted with deviations (standard deviation). These deviations are
divided by light, normal and hard operating conditions. The division of operating
conditions must be made by the user according to the view points of terrain condi-
tions, condition of job site, organization of job site, material, machine equipment,
working procedure and education level of the operator.
Since the provided values of individual effective values are for certain, usual appli-
cation ranges, an evaluation of the stress on the operator due to whole body vibra-
tions is possible only on a limited basis. For exact evaluation of the daily exposure
of an operator over an 8 hour workday exactly, use the Liebherr brochure about
whole body vibrations and the associated software. Both items can be obtained
from the Liebherr dealer or checked in any documentation CD (Liebherr Parts),
which is provided for each new machine. (For more information see: 2.4.18 Protec-
tion from vibrations, page 50)
Weighted effective values in m/s2 for light, normal and hard operating
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
conditions
Machine type Typical work cycles x-axis y-axis z-axis
light norma hard light norma hard light norma hard
l l l
Load & Carry 0,55 0,64 0,72 0,36 0,48 0,59 0,42 0,52 0,62
Crawler loader Transfer 0,29 0,41 0,54 0,26 0,35 0,44 0,45 0,60 0,75
V-operation 0,59 0,89 1,18 0,41 0,66 0,91 0,45 0,63 0,81

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 17
Technical data
Weighted effective values in m/s2 for light, normal and hard operating
conditions
Machine type Typical work cycles x-axis y-axis z-axis
light norma hard light norma hard light norma hard
l l l
Telescopic Work cycle 0,20 0,37 0,55 0,19 0,28 0,38 0,42 0,56 0,71
handler
Grading 0,31 0,53 0,75 0,24 0,41 0,59 0,39 0,70 1,01
Crawler tractor with ripper 0,61 0,89 1,18 0,56 0,85 1,14 0,74 1,02 1,30
Transfer 0,31 0,62 0,93 0,29 0,57 0,86 0,63 0,97 1,31
Pipe layer Work cycle 0,09 0,15 0,21 0,09 0,16 0,24 0,10 0,24 0,38
Conveyor Work cycle 0,63 0,52 0,57
mover
Tab. 1
The test uncertainty is defined in Standard EN 12096: 1997.
1.2.2 Sound emission

The sound emission values for the machine are provided in the Technical Data.
The sound power level (Lwa) is determined according to directive 2000/14/EC. The
measurement uncertainty is determined according to Standard ISO 4871.
The sound pressure level (Lpa) is determined according to ISO 6396. The meas-
urement uncertainty is defined in this standard.
1.2.3 Maximum operating weight

The maximum operating weight of the machine may not be exceeded for reasons
of machine safety and operating suitability.
If the maximum operating weight will be exceeded due to special retrofit installa-
tions (such as for land clearing work), request a written approval from Liebherr
before installation.
The maximum permissible operating weight of the machine is: PR 734L / XL / LGP
= 22108 kg.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
18 PR734-1481 / 13743
Crawler Tractor PR 734-4
litronic`
Engine: 150 kW / 204 HP

Stage IIIA / Tier 3
Operating Weight: 17,960 – 22,100 kg

39,595 – 48,722 lb
Base Machine
Engine Undercarriage
Liebherr Diesel engine D 934-L-A6 L XL LGP
Emission regulations according to Mounting Via separate pivot shafts and equalizer bar
2004 / 26 / EC Stage IIIA and EPA / CARB Tier 3 Track chains Sealed and lubricated chains, single-grouser
Rated power (net) track shoes, track chain tension via steel spring
ISO 9249 150 kW/204 HP and grease tensioner
SAE J1349 150 kW/201 HP Links, each side 38 43 43
Maximum power (net) Track rollers, each side 6 7 7
ISO 9249 175 kW/238 HP Carrier rollers, each side 1 2 2
SAE J1349 175 kW/235 HP Sprocket segments,
Rated speed 1,800 rpm each side 5 5 5
Displacement 7.0 l / 427 in3 Track shoes, standard 508 mm / 20” 610 mm / 24” 812 mm / 32”
Design 4 cylinder in-line engine, water-cooled. Track shoes, optional 560 mm / 22” 865 mm / 34”
Turbocharged, intercooled 610 mm / 24”
Injection system Direct fuel injection, pump-line-nozzle system,
electronic control
Lubrication Force-feed lubrication, engine lubrication Operator’s Cab
guaranteed for inclinations up to 45° Cab Resiliently mounted cab with positive pressure
Operating voltage 24 V ventilation, can be tilted with hand pump 40° to
Alternator 80 A the rear (option). With integrated ROPS Rollover
Starter 6.6 kW Protective Structure (ISO 3471) and FOPS
Batteries 2 x 140 Ah / 12V Falling Objects Protective Structure (ISO 3449)
Air cleaner Dry-type air cleaner with safety element, Operator’s seat Fully adjustable suspended seat
aspirated pre-cleaner, service gauge in cab Monitoring Combined analogue / LC display, automatic
Cooling system Combi radiator, comprising radiators for water, monitoring of operating conditions
hydraulic fluid, charge air, fuel. Hydrostatic fan
drive
Refill Capacities
Fuel tank 400 l / 88 lmp.gal
Travel Drive, Control Cooling system 37 l / 8.1 lmp.gal
Transmission system Infinitely variable hydrostatic travel drive, Engine oil with oil filters 29 l / 6.4 lmp.gal
independent drive for each track Splitter box 3.1 l / 0.7 lmp.gal
Travel speed* continuously variable Hydraulic tank 144 l / 31.7 lmp.gal
Speed range 1 (reverse):
0 – 4.0 km / h / 2.5 mph (4.8 km / h / 3.0 mph) Final drive L, each side 19.5 l / 4.3 lmp.gal
0 – 6.5 km / h / 4.0 mph (7.8 km / h / 4.8 mph) Final drive XL, each side 19.5 l / 4.3 Imp.gal
0 – 10.0 km / h / 6.2 mph (10.0 km / h / 6.2 mph) Final drive LGP, each side 25.5 l / 5.6 lmp.gal
* Factory settings. All speed ranges can be
customized on the travel joystick
Drawbar pull 274 kN at 1.5 km / h / 0.9 mph
Electronic control Electronic engine speed control automatically Sound Emissions
adjusts travel speed and drawbar pull to match Operator sound exposure LpA = 79 dB(A)
changing load conditions ISO 6396:2008 (in the cab)
Steering Hydrostatic Exterior sound pressure LwA = 111 dB(A)
Service brake Wear-free, hydrostatic (dynamic braking) ISO 6395:1988 (to the environment)
Automatic park brake Wet multiple-disc brakes, wear-free,
automatically applied when joystick is in neutral
position Drawbar Pull PR 734-4
Cooling system Hydraulic oil cooler, integrated in combi radiator Max. 319 kN
Filter system Micro cartridge filters at 1.5 km/h / 0.9 mph 281 kN
Final drive Heavy-duty combination spur gear with at 3.0 km/h / 1.9 mph 154 kN
planetary gear, double sealed with electronic at 6.0 km/h / 3.7 mph 77 kN
seal-integrity indicator at 9.0 km/h / 5.6 mph 51 kN
Control Single joystick for all travel and steering functions
Hydraulics
Hydraulic system Open-center with load-sensing valve block and
gear pump
Pump flow max. 222 l / min / 48.8 gpm
Pressure limitation 200 bar
Control valve 2 segments, expandable to 3
Filter system Return filter with magnetic rod
Control Single joystick for all blade functions
2 PR 734-4 Litronic
Dimensions
H
T0104 T0104
D C E
B F
G
Image shows XL undercarriage
Dimensions
Undercarriage L XL LGP
A Height over cab mm 3,284 3,284 3,284
ft in 10’9” 10’9” 10’9”
B Overall length without attachments mm 4,170 4,170 4,170
ft in 13’8” 13’8” 13’8”
C Length of track on ground mm 2,630 3,136 3,136
ft in 8’8” 10’3” 10’3”
D Grouser height mm 65 65 65
in 2.56” 2.56” 2.56”
E Track gauge mm 1,830 1,830 2,070
ft in 6’0” 6’0” 6’9”
G Total width over blade-mounting trunnions mm 2,724 2,724 3,474
ft in 8’11” 8’11” 11’5”
H Ground clearance mm 497 497 497
ft in 1’8” 1’8” 1’8”
Track shoes 508 mm / 20”
F Total width without trunnions mm / ft in 2,338 / 7’8” – –
Tractor shipping weight1 kg / lb 15,291 / 33,711
F Total width without trunnions mm / ft in 2,390 / 7’10” – –
F Total width without trunnions mm / ft in 2,440 / 8’0” 2,440 / 8’0” –
Tractor shipping weight1 kg / lb 15,533 / 34,244 16,322 / 53’7”
F Total width without trunnions mm / ft in – – 2,882 / 9’5”
F Total width without trunnions mm / ft in – – 2,935 / 9’8”
1 Includes coolant and lubricants, 20 % fuel, ROPS / FOPS cab.
PR 734-4 Litronic 3
Front Attachments
B G
A
C
T0105
T0105
D H
E
Semi-U Blade and Semi-U Blade Straight Blade Semi-U Blade Straight Blade Straight Blade
Straight Blade Undercarriage L L XL XL LGP
Blade capacity, ISO 9246 m3 5.56 4.21 5.56 4.21 4.10
yd3 7.27 5.51 7.27 5.51 5.36
A Height of blade mm 1,400 1,300 1,400 1,300 1,150
ft in 4’7” 4’3” 4’7” 4’3” 3’9”
B Width of blade mm 3,372 3,420 3,372 3,420 3,994
ft in 11’1” 11’3” 11’1” 11’3” 13’1”
C Lifting height mm 1,179 1,182 1,208 1,210 1,219
ft in 3’10” 3’11” 4’ 4’ 4’
D Digging depth mm 524 525 548 549 552
ft in 1’9” 1’9” 1’10” 1’10” 1’10”
E Blade pitch adjustment 10° 10° 10° 10° 10°
Max. blade tilt mm 780 790 780 790 714

ft in 2’7” 2’7” 2’7” 2’7” 2’4”
G Width over push frame mm 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,750
ft in 9’10” 9’10” 9’10” 9’10” 12’4”
H Overall length mm 5,521 5,300 5,791 5,570 5,581
ft in 18’1” 17’5” 19’ 18’3” 18’4”
Operating weight1 kg / lb 18,060 / 39,815 17,960 / 39,595 – – –
Ground pressure1 kg / cm² / PSI 0.68 / 9.67 0.67 / 9.53
Operating weight1 kg / lb 18,160 / 40,036 18,060 / 39,815 – – –
Operating weight1 kg / lb 18,302 / 40,349 18,202 / 40,128 19,091 / 42,088 18,990 / 41,866 –
Ground pressure1 kg / cm² / PSI 0.57 / 8.11 0.57 / 8.11 0.50 / 7.11 0.49 / 6.97
Operating weight1 kg / lb – – – – 20,066 / 44,238
Ground pressure1 kg / cm² / PSI 0.40 / 5.69
Operating weight1 kg / lb – – – – 20,198 / 44,529
Ground pressure1 kg / cm² / PSI 0.37 / 5.26
1 Includes coolant and lubricants, 20 % fuel, ROPS / FOPS cab, operator, semi-U blade or straight blade.
4 PR 734-4 Litronic
Front Attachments
B1 B
G
F
A C
T0106
T0106
D
H H1
Mechanical without Tilt Function with Tilt Function2

Angle Blade* Undercarriage XL
Blade capacity, ISO 9246 m3 3.80 3.80
yd3 4.97 4.97
A Height of blade mm 1,120 1,120
ft in 3’8” 3’8”
B Width of blade mm 4,240 4,240
ft in 13’11” 13’11”
B1 Width of blade, angled mm 3,850 3,850
ft in 12’8” 12’8”
C Lifting height mm 1,212 1,212
ft in 4’ 4’
D Digging depth mm 644 644
ft in 2’1” 2’1”
F Blade angle adjustment 25° 25°
Max. blade tilt. mm – 672

ft in 2’2”
G Width over push frame mm 2,890 2,890
ft in 9’6” 9’6”
H Overall length, blade straight mm 5,786 5,786
ft in 19’ 19’
H1 Overall length, blade angled mm 6,610 6,610
ft in 21’8” 21’8”
Operating weight1 kg / lb – –
Ground pressure1 kg / cm² / PSI
Operating weight1 kg / lb – –
Ground pressure1 kg / cm² / PSI
Operating weight1 kg / lb 19,448 / 42,875 19,548 / 43,096
1 Includes coolant and lubricants, 20 % fuel, ROPS / FOPS cab, operator, mechanical angle blade.
2 Mechanical angle blade with tilt function is subject to lead time – please enquire with your Liebherr dealer.
* Counterweight or rear attachment is recommended for improved performance and balance.
PR 734-4 Litronic 5
Rear Attachments
T0085
B
C
D T0085
Ripper
Parallelogram 3-Shank Ripper
A Ripping depth (max. / min.) mm 522 / 372
ft in 1’9” / 1’3”
B Lifting height (max. / min.) mm 665 / 515
ft in 2’2” / 1’8”
C Additional length, attachment raised mm 1,199
ft in 3’11”
D Additional length, attachment lowered mm 1,531
ft in 5’0”
E Overall beam width mm 2,320
ft in 7’7”
F Distance between shanks mm 1,000
ft in 3’3”
Weight kg 1,920
lb 4,233
6 PR 734-4 Litronic
Equipment
Base Machine Operator’s Cab Control and
Air filter, dry-type, dual step • Armrests 3D adjustable • Warning Lights
Air filter with automatic dust ejector • Coat hook •
Control travel speed range (digital) •
Battery compartment, lockable • Dome light •
Control engine coolant temperature
Belly pans, heavy duty • Operator’s seat, 6-way adjustable •
(analogue) •
Engine cover, perforated • Operator’seat, mechanically suspended •
Control fuel level (analogue) •
Engine door, hinged, lockable • Pressurised cab •
Hour meter (analogue) •
Engine doors, perforated • Rear-view mirror, inside •
Indicator light Diesel engine preheater •
Fan guard • ROPS / FOPS •
Indicator light float position blade •
Fan, hydraulically driven • Safety glass, tinted •
Indicator light parking brake •
Fuel water separator • Storage compartment •
Main warning light •
Liebherr Diesel engine • Warm water heating •
Warning light air filter •
Lugs for crane lifting, front • Windshield washer system •
Warning light battery charging •
Radiator guard • Windshield wipers front, rear, on the
Warning light diesel engine •
Radiator, wide-meshed • doors, with intermittent function •
Warning light electronic travel
Tow switch • Air conditioning +
control system •
Fan, hydraulically driven, reversible + External mirrors +
Warning light fan control •
Fuel water separator with electric heater + Fire extinguisher +
Warning light fuel water separator •
LiDAT – Liebherr data transmission system + Forest sweeps +
Warning light hydraulic oil temperature •
Liebherr hydraulic oil, Plus Arctic + Operator’s seat, air-suspended +
Warning light oil return filter •
Sealing, cab – base machine + Protective grids for rear windows +
Warning light pump repleneshing pressure •
Tank guard, bottom + Protective grids for windows, all-around +
Warning light final drive seal, each side •
Tank guard, complete + Radio +
Hydraulic oil temperature gauge +
Toolkit, extended + Radio preparation +
Warning light hydraulic oil level +
Towing hitch rear + Sliding window, left +
Coal equipment + Sliding window, right +
Cold kit + Tiltable cab +
Forestry equipment + Hydraulic System
Landfill equipment + Control valve for 2 circuits •
Woodchip equipment + Undercarriage Float position blade •
Hydraulic servo control •
Master link, two-piece •
Oil filter in hydraulic tank •
Pivot shaft, separate •
Travel Drive Hydraulics, ripper +
Sprocket segments, bolted •
Hydraulics, winch +
Control, single joystick • Track frame, closed •
Hydraulic tank oil level control +
Electronic control • Track frames, oscillating •
Emergency stop • Tracks oil-lubricated •
Final drives planetary gear • Coal deflector at sprocket +
Function control, automatic • Final drive seal guards + Attachments
Hydrostatic travel drive • Sprocket segments, with recesses + Coal-U blade 1), 2) +
Load limit control, electronic • Track guard, full length + Counterweight, rear +
Oil cooler • Track guide centre part + Drawbar rear, rigid +
Parking brake, automatic • Track pads with mud holes + Lifting lugs, rear +
Safety lever • Track shoes ESS + Mechanical angle blade 2) +
Travel control, 3 speed ranges • Tracks, grease-lubricated + Mounting plate for external equipment +
Inching brake pedal + Undercarriage L + Ripper, 1 shank +
Undercarriage XL + Ripper, 3 shanks +
Undercarriage LGP + Semi-U blade 1), 2) +
Electrical System Spill plate for blade +

Straight blade 1), 2), 3) +
Alternator 80 A •
Trash rack +
Batteries, cold start, 2 units •
Wear plates for push frame +
Battery main switch, mechanical •
Winch +
Horn •
Woodchip U-blade 1), 2) +
On-board system, 24 V •
Starter 6.6 kW •
Working lights front, 2 units •
Working lights rear, 2 units •
Additional lights front, 2 units + • = Standard
Additional lights, on lift cylinders + + = Option
Additional lights rear, 2 units + 1) Undercarriage L Options and / or special attachments, supplied
Back-up alarm, acoustic + 2) Undercarriage XL by vendors other than Liebherr, are only to be
installed with the knowledge and approval of
Beacon + 3) Undercarriage LGP Liebherr to retain warranty.
PR 734-4 Litronic 7

The Liebherr Group of Companies
Wide Product Range State-of-the-art Technology

The Liebherr Group is one of the largest construction equipment To provide consistent, top quality products, Liebherr attaches
manufacturers in the world. Liebherr’s high-value products and great importance to each product area, its components and
services enjoy a high reputation in many other fields. The wide core technologies. Important modules and components are
range includes domestic appliances, aerospace and trans- developed and manufactured in-house, for instance the entire
portation systems, machine tools and maritime cranes. drive and control technology for construction equipment.
Exceptional Customer Benefit Worldwide and Independent

Every product line provides a complete range of models in many Hans Liebherr founded the Liebherr family company in 1949.
different versions. With both their technical excellence and Since that time, the enterprise has steadily grown to a group of
acknowledged quality, Liebherr products offer a maximum of more than 130 companies with over 41,000 employees located
customer benefits in practical application. on all continents. The corporate headquarters of the Group is
Liebherr-International AG in Bulle, Switzerland. The Liebherr
All illustrations and data may differ from standard equipment. Subject to change without notice.
family is the sole owner of the company.
www.liebherr.com
RG-BK-RP LWT / VM 11822682-web-12.15_enGB
Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH

Hans Liebherr-Straße 35, A-6410 Telfs
 +43 50809 6-100, Fax +43 50809 6-7772
www.liebherr.com, E-Mail: lwt.marketing@liebherr.com
www.facebook.com/LiebherrConstruction
Tightening torques
1.3 Tightening torques
1.3.1 Tightening torques for hex head screws

Installation pretension forces FM and tightening torques MA for headless screws with
metric standard or fine thread according to:
– DIN ISO 262 and DIN ISO 965 T2 (Replacement for DIN 13 Part 13)
– DIN EN 24014 (Replacement for DIN 931 Part 1) for head dimensions of hex
head screws with stud
– DIN EN ISO 4762 (Replacement for DIN 912) for fillister head screws
The chart values are valid for screws with surface:
– black or phosphated – oiled
– zinc plated – oiled
– flZn according to LH-standard 10021432 - dry
Any tightening torque values or tightening procedures noted in drawings, parts
lists, instructions or component descriptions must be adhered to and given prefer-
ence over factory standards.
Beginning with grade 10.9, no additional safety effect is provided when using lock
washers.
Always use a torque wrench of suitable size. The torque, according to the chart,
should be in the upper third of the existing test range.
When using impact screws, make sure to observe the specified tightening torque.
A pre-check and possible intermediate checks with a torque wrench are required.
Preload values and tightening torques for screws with metric standard thread
according to factory standard WN 4037I
Metric standard Preload force FM Tightening torques MA Wrench size for Wrench size for
thread according to grades [N] according to grades [Nm] hex head socket head
screws screws
8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9 mm Inch mm Inch
M 4 x 0.7 4 050 6 000 7 000 2,8 4,1 4,8 7 9/32 3 --
M 5 x 0.8 6 600 9 700 11 400 5,5 8,1 9,5 8 5/16 4 5/32
M6x1 9 400 13700 16 100 9,5 14 16,5 10 -- 5 --
M7x1 13 700 20 100 23 500 15,5 23 27 11 -- -- --
M 8 x 1.25 17 200 25 000 29 500 23 34 40 13 1/2 6 --
M 10 x 1.5 27 500 40 000 47 000 46 68 79 (17)16 (11/16) 8 5/16
M 12 x 1.75 40 000 59 000 69 000 79 117 135 (19)18 (3/4) 10 --
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
M 14 x 2 55 000 80 000 94 000 125 185 215 (22)21 (7/8) 12 --

M 16 x 2 75 000 111 000 130 000 195 280 330 24 -- 14 9/16
M 18 x 2.5 94 000 135 000 157 000 280 390 460 27 1 - 1/16 14 9/16
M 20 x 2.5 121 000 173 000 202 000 390 560 650 30 1 - 3/16 17 --
M 22 x 2.5 152 000 216 000 250 000 530 750 880 (32)34 -- 17 --
M 24 x 3 175 000 249 000 290 000 670 960 1 120 36 1 - 7/16 19 3/4
M 27 x 3 230 000 330 000 385 000 1 000 1 400 1 650 41 1 - 5/8 19 3/4

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 19
Tightening torques
Metric standard Preload force FM Tightening torques MA Wrench size for Wrench size for
thread according to grades [N] according to grades [Nm] hex head socket head
screws screws
M 30 x 3.5 280 000 400 000 465 000 1 350 1 900 2 250 46 1- 22 7/8
13/16
M 33 x 3.5 350 000 495 000 580 000 1 850 2 600 3 000 50 2 24 --
M 36 x 4 410 000 580 000 680 000 2 350 3 300 3 900 55 2 - 3/16 27 1 - 1/16
M 39 x 4 490 000 700 000 820 000 3 000 4 300 5 100 60 2 - 3/8 27 1 - 1/16
Tab. 2
Preload values and tightening torques for screws with fine metric thread
according to factory standard WN 4037I
Metric fine Wrench size for Wrench size for

Preload force FM Tightening torques MA
thread hex head socket head
according to grades [N] according to grades [Nm]
screws screws
8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9 mm Inch mm Inch
M8x1 18 800 27 500 32 500 24,5 36 43 13 1/2 6 -
M9x1 24 800 36 500 42 500 36 53 62 - - - -
M 10 x 1 31 500 46 500 54 000 52 76 89 17 11/16 8 5/16
M 10 x 1.25 29 500 43 000 51 000 49 72 84 17 11/16 8 5/16
M 12 x 1.25 45 000 66 000 77 000 87 125 150 19 3/4 10 -
M 12 x 1.5 42 500 62 000 73 000 83 122 145 19 3/4 10 -
M 14 x 1.5 61 000 89 000 104 000 135 200 235 22 7/8 12 -
M 16 x 1.5 82 000 121 000 141 000 205 300 360 24 - 14 9/16
M 18 x 1.5 110 000 157 000 184 000 310 440 520 27 1 - 1/16 14 9/16
M 18 x 2 102 000 146 000 170 000 290 420 490 27 1 - 1/16 14 9/16
M 20 x 1.5 139 000 199 000 232 000 430 620 720 30 1 - 3/16 17 -
M 22 x 1.5 171 000 245 000 285 000 580 820 960 32 - 17 -
M 24 x 1.5 207 000 295 000 346 000 760 1 090 1 270 36 1 - 7/16 19 3/4
M 24 x 2 196 000 280 000 325 000 730 1 040 1 220 36 1 - 7/16 19 3/4
M 27 x 1.5 267 000 381 000 445 000 1 110 1 580 1 850 41 1 - 5/8 19 3/4
M 27 x 2 255 000 365 000 425 000 1 070 1 500 1 800 41 1 - 5/8 19 3/4
1-
M 30 x 1.5 335 000 477 000 558 000 1 540 2 190 2 560 46 22 7/8
13/16
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
1-
M 30 x 2 321 000 457 000 534 000 1 490 2 120 2 480 46 22 7/8
13/16
M 33 x 1.5 410 000 584 000 683 000 2 050 2 920 3 420 50 2 24 -
M 33 x 2 395 000 560 000 660 000 2 000 2 800 3 300 50 2 24 -
M 36 x 1.5 492 000 701 000 820 000 2 680 3 820 4 470 55 2 - 3/16 27 1 - 1/16
M 36 x 3 440 000 630 000 740 000 2 500 3 500 4 100 55 2 - 3/16 27 1 - 1/16
M 39 x 1.5 582 000 830 000 971 000 3 430 4 890 5 720 60 2 - 3/8 27 1 - 1/16

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
20 PR734-1481 / 13743
Tightening torques
Metric fine Wrench size for Wrench size for

Preload force FM Tightening torques MA
thread hex head socket head
according to grades [N] according to grades [Nm]
screws screws
M 39 x 3 530 000 750 000 880 000 3 200 4 600 5 300 60 2 - 3/8 27 1 - 1/16
Tab. 3
1.3.2 Tightening torques for countersunk screws

Installation pretension forces FM and tightening torques MA for countersunk screws
with hexagon socket with metric standard or fine thread according to:
– DIN ISO 261
– DIN EN 10642 and DIN 7991 for head dimensions of countersunk screws with
hexagon socket
– DIN 74 for countersink
The chart values are valid for screws with surface:
– black or phosphated – oiled
– zinc plated – oiled
– flZn according to LH-standard 10021432 - dry
Any tightening torque values or tightening procedures noted in drawings, parts
lists, instructions or component descriptions must be adhered to and given prefer-
ence over factory standards.
When tightening in aluminum, with or without Helicoil insert, the values for class 8.8
must be used. On drawings, parts lists, instructions or component descriptions the
stated tightening torque values are binding, paramount and must be adhered to.
Scope of application and purpose
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 3: Screw connection and bolt connection for countersunk screws
Screw connection with tapped blind hole

– 1 Tighten on the head side
Screw connections are tightened with the torques noted in the chart. Due to unfav-
orable friction conditions under the head rest, the obtained pretension force is
hereby reduced. Screw connections with countersunk screws should therefore be
avoided!
(Screw utilization approx. 53% of the yield strength)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 21
Tightening torques
Bolt connections with hex nut

– 2 Counter on the head side
– 3 Tighten on the nut side
Bolt connections with countersunk bolts according to ISO 10642 must be tightened
via the nut with the torque noted in the following chart. In doing so, the installation
pretension forces stated in the chart will be reached.
(Screw utilization approx. 70% of the yield strength)
Pretension forces and tightening torques for countersunk screws with
hexagon socket with metric standard thread
Metric standard Preload force FM Tightening torques MA

thread according to grades [N] according to grades [Nm]
8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 2 670 3 800 4 450 2,3 3,3 3,9
M6 6 160 8 780 10 200 8,1 11 13
M8 11 200 16 000 18 800 19 28 33
M 10 17 900 25 600 29 900 39 56 65
M 12 26 100 37 300 43 600 69 98 110
M 14 36 000 51 300 60 000 100 150 180
M 16 49 600 70 600 82 600 160 230 270
M 18 60 400 86 000 100 000 220 320 380
M 20 77 600 110 000 129 000 320 450 530
M 22 97 400 138 000 162 000 420 600 710
M 24 112 000 160 000 187 000 530 760 890
Tab. 4
Pretension forces and tightening torques for countersunk screws with

hexagon socket with metric fine thread
Metric fine Preload force FM Tightening torques MA

8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9
M8x1 12 300 17 500 20 500 21 30 35
M 10 x 1 20 600 29 400 34 400 44 62 73
M 10 x 1.25 19 300 27 400 32 100 41 59 69
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
M 12 x 1.5 27 700 39 500 46 300 72 100 120

M 14 x 1.5 39 800 56 600 66 300 110 160 190
M 16 x 1.5 53 900 76 800 89 900 170 250 290
M 18 x 1.5 70 200 100 000 117 000 250 360 430
M 18 x 2 65 200 92 900 108 000 240 340 400
M 20 x 1.5 88 700 126 000 147 000 350 500 590
M 22 x 1.5 109 000 156 000 183 000 460 660 770

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
22 PR734-1481 / 13743
Tightening torques
Metric fine Preload force FM Tightening torques MA

M 24 x 1.5 125 000 179 000 209 000 580 830 970
M 24 x 2 125 000 179 000 209 000 580 830 970
Tab. 5
1.3.3 Tightening torque for cutting edges, end bits and

adapters
Inch mm Tightening torque / Nm Tightening torque / ft. lbs.

5/8 16 270 40 200 30
3/4 19 475 60 350 45
7/8 22 750 90 550 65
1 25 1125 150 825 110
1-1/4 32 1850 300 1350 220
Tab. 6
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 23
Tightening torques
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
24 PR734-1481 / 13743
2 Safety guidelines, signs
Working with the machine is dangerous, serious or fatal injuries can happen to you,
the operator, the driver or maintenance personnel. If you regularly read and
observe the various safety information, you can prevent dangers and accidents.
This applies especially for personnel who is working only intermittently on the
machine, such as for set up, maintenance.
The following information comprises safety guidelines which, if followed conscien-
tiously, will guarantee your safety and that of other persons, as well as avoid
damage to the machine.
For description of work, which can pose a danger for man or machine, the required
safety precautions are described in this manual.
2.1 Designation of warning notes
This is the warning sign. Warns of possible danger of injury.

Follow all measures, which are marked with this warning sign to
avoid injuries or death.
Tab. 7
The warning sign always appears in connection with the signal words
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
DANGER designates a dangerous situation which will lead

to death or serious injury if it is not prevented.
WARNING designates a dangerous situation, which can lead

to death or serious injury if it is not prevented.
CAUTION designates a dangerous situation, which can lead

to light or medium injuries if it is not prevented.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
ATTENTION designates a dangerous situation, which can lead

to property damage if it is not prevented.
Tab. 8

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 25
Safety guidelines, signs Operator's manual
Signs on the machine
2.1.1 Additional designations
Note gives useful notes and tips.
Tab. 9
2.1.2 Additional rules and guidelines

Following these notes does not relieve you of responsibility for following
additional rules and guidelines!
Additional points that should be noted are:
– the safety regulations which apply on the jobsite
– lawful “traffic regulations”
– the guidelines provided by professional associations
2.2 Destined use
With normal dozing attachment, the machine is only designed for loosening,
moving and dumping soil, rocks, broken stones or other materials.
Machines in lifting application are subject to special conditions and must be
equipped with the specified safety devices (before lifting application, request the
information from Liebherr and observe it).
Machines utilized in underground applications (deep mining and tunnel construc-
tion) in surroundings which are not endangered by explosions must be equipped
with technologies for exhaust reduction (for example with Diesel particle filters).
The individual state requirements must be observed.
Special applications require special equipment and possibly special safety devices.
This equipment may only be installed and used after approval and according to
specifications by the basic machine manufacturer.
Any other use or use above and beyond, such as demolition of rock and buildings,
ramming poles, transporting personnel or working in explosion endangered as well
as contaminated surroundings is considered not to be destined use. The manufac-
turer is not liable for damage resulting from this action. The user is solely respon-
sible for the risk incurred.
Observing the operating instructions and the inspection / maintenance instructions
is also deemed to be appropriate use in accordance with regulations.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
2.3 Signs on the machine
Your machine displays several types of signs.

– Safety signs
– Reference signs
– Data tags
Contents and location are described below.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
26 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Safety guidelines, signs
The Id. Numbers are noted in the spare parts list.
2.3.1 Safety signs

Non-observance of safety signs can result in serious injury or death.
Regularly check the safety signs to ensure they are complete and legible
Replace missing or illegible safety signs immediately.
Location of safety signs
Fig. 9: Location of safety signs

1 Stay clear warning sign 5 Accident prevention sign 10 Operator's platform support
sign
2 Engine standstill sign 6 Downhill travel sign 11 Battery sign
3 Track tension sign 8 Cab tilt device sign
4 Safety lever sign 9 Seatbelt sign
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 27
Stay clear warning sign
Fig. 10: Stay clear warning sign
The sign is installed on the outside, on the left and right-hand side, as well as on
the rear of the machine.
Warns of danger of accidents potentially resulting in death or very severe injuries.
Meaning: It is prohibited for anyone to remain in the danger zone!
Engine standstill sign
Fig. 11: Engine standstill sign
The sign is installed on the left and right-hand side on the engine compartment
doors.
Warns of danger of accidents leading to potentially very severe injuries.
Meaning: Open only if the diesel engine is not running!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
28 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track tension sign
Fig. 12: Track tension sign
The sign is installed on the left and right on the track roller frame, on the cover near
the grease cylinder.
Meaning: When releasing the track, keep your head away from the track roller
frame. Sagging track and spraying grease.
Safety lever sign
Fig. 13: Safety lever sign
The sign is installed on the front on the operator’s platform.

Warns of danger of accidents potentially leading to death or very severe injuries.
Meaning: Before leaving the operator's cab, move the safety lever up. In
danger situations, lower the working attachment immediately, then move the
safety lever up.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 29
Accident prevention sign
Fig. 14: Accident prevention sign
The sign is installed on the front on the operator’s platform.

Shows the importance of reading the operator's manual and the printed safety
instructions for accident prevention.
Meaning: Operate the machine only if you have read and understand the oper-
ator's manual. The accident prevention guidelines given in the operator's
manual must be carefully observed when operating the machine!
Downhill travel sign
Fig. 15: Accident prevention sign
The sign is installed on the left-hand side on the operator’s platform.

Warns of engine speed increase when driving downhill.
Meaning: When travelling downhill keep the engine speed under 2100 rpm!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
30 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's platform - Tilt device sign
Fig. 16: Operator's platform - Tilt device sign
The sign is installed in the battery compartment near the hydraulic hand pump.
Meaning: Do not stand under the tilted operator's platform unless the safety
support bar is in place. When the operator's platform is tilted, the machine
may not be started or driven, the safety lever must remain in park position.
Seatbelt sign
Fig. 17: Seatbelt sign
The sign is installed on the left-hand side on the operator’s platform.

Notes the importance of wearing the seatbelt.
Meaning: Always wear the seatbelt before operating the machine.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 31
Operator's platform support sign
Fig. 18: Operator's platform support sign
The sign is installed on the safety support bar on the operator’s platform tilt
cylinder.
Meaning: Indicates the correct procedure for tilting the operator’s platform.
Carefully observe the instructions on the sign as well as those in the opera-
tor's manual.
Battery sign
Fig. 19: Battery sign
The sign is installed in the battery compartment.

Meaning: Do not smoke, avoid naked lights near batteries!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
2.3.2 Reference signs

Reference signs denote specific points relating to the operation, maintenance and
characteristics of the machine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
32 PR734-1481 / 13743
Location of reference signs
Fig. 20: Location of reference signs

1 Type plate 6 Sign Noise protection 11 Sign Ripper
2 Sign Rops / Fops 7 Sign Lifting point stop 12 Sign Working hydraulics
3 Sign MIN / MAX hydraulic 8 Sign Window washer fluid 13 Sign Coolant
tank
4 Sign Splash water 9 Lubrication chart 14 Sign Chain tension
5 Sign Travel hydraulics 10 Sign Emergency exit
Sign Rops - Fops

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 21: Sign Rops - Fops

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 33
The sign is installed in the documentation compartment.

Shows the maximum load for roll over protective structure.
Sign MIN/MAX Hydraulic tank
Fig. 22: Sign MIN/MAX Hydraulic tank
The sign is installed on the sight gauge of the hydraulic tank.
Sign Splash water
Fig. 23: Sign Splash water
The sign is installed in the central electric compartment.

Do not spray splash water (high pressure cleaner, steam cleaner,...) into the central
electric compartment.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
34 PR734-1481 / 13743
Sign Travel hydraulics
Fig. 24: Sign Travel hydraulics
The sign is installed on the left hand side on the operator’s platform.
Shows the operation of the travel joystick for the travel functions of the machine.
Sign Noise protection
Fig. 25: Sign Noise protection
The sign is installed on the inside on the operator's cab window.

LWA = Sound output level (sound output level emitted to the surrounding area)
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 35
Sign Stop-lift point
Fig. 26: Sign Stop-lift point
The sign is located on the fastening - lifting points of the machine.

Indicates the machine’s fastening - lifting points.
Sign Window washer fluid
Fig. 27: Sign Window washer fluid
The sign is installed on the filler neck of the window washer fluid reservoir.
Sign Lubrication chart

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 28: Sign Lubrication chart
The sign is installed on the battery box.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
36 PR734-1481 / 13743
The lubrication schedule shows all parts which are filled with oil and grease as well
as their inspection and maintenance intervals.
Sign Emergency exit
Fig. 29: Sign Emergency exit
The sign is installed on the right operator’s cab door.

Denotes the emergency exit.
Sign Ripper
Fig. 30: Sign Ripper
The sign is installed on the right hand side on the operator’s platform.
Shows the operation of the ripper.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 37
Sign Working hydraulics
Fig. 31: Sign Working hydraulics
The sign is installed on the right hand side on the operator’s platform.
Shows the operation of the boom attachment of the machine.
Sign Coolant
Fig. 32: Sign Coolant
The sign is installed on the filler neck of the coolant tank.

Indicates the specified coolant in the Operating instructions.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
38 PR734-1481 / 13743
Sign Chain tension
Fig. 33: Sign Chain tension
The sign is installed on the battery box.

Indicates the specified chain tension.
2.3.3 Type plates

The machine and components, such as the diesel engine, transmission, pumps
etc. are marked with a type plate. The serial numbers for the individual compo-
nents are shown on the type plate.
Machine type plate
Fig. 34: Machine type plate
The sign is fitted to the left front on the main frame.

Information on the type plate:
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
– Type
– Vehicle Id. No.
– Permissible overall weight
– Year of manufacture
– Engine power
– Maximum speed

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 39
Safety guidelines
2.4 Safety guidelines
2.4.1 General safety instructions

1. Please familiarize yourself with the Operating instructions before starting the
machine.
Make sure that you have obtained, read and understand any additional instruc-
tions relating to special accessories for the machine.
2. Only explicitly authorized personnel may operate, maintain or repair the
machine.
Observe the permissible minimum legal age limits!
3. Use only trained or instructed personnel, clearly determine the responsibility of
the personnel for operation, set up, maintenance and repairs.
4. Determine the machine operator responsibility (also in regards to traffic regula-
tions) and allow him to refuse unsafe instructions from third persons.
5. Do not allow any person either still to be trained or already in training to
operate or work on the machine unless under the constant supervision and
guidance of an experienced instructor or operator.
6. Check and observe any person working or operating the machine at least peri-
odically if they observe safety instructions and guidelines given in the Oper-
ating instructions.
7. Always wear proper work clothing when operating or working on the machine.
Avoid wearing rings, watches, ties, scarves, open jackets, loose clothing, etc.
There is a danger of injury, as they can get stuck or be pulled in.
For certain work, the following is required: Safety glasses, safety shoes, hard
hat, working gloves, reflective vest, ear protection ...
8. Consult the supervisor at the jobsite for special safety instructions and regula-
tions.
9. When entering or exiting, never use the safety lever or the control levers or
joysticks as handholds.
This could trigger inadvertent movement of the machine and cause serious
accidents.
10. Never jump off the machine. When climbing on or off the machine, use the
intended steps, ladders and catwalks and handles. Use both hands for support
and face the machine.
11. Keep steps, ladders and handles free of oil, grease, mud, snow and ice. These
precautions will minimize the danger of slipping, stumbling or falling.
12. Make yourself familiar with the emergency exit.
13. If no other instructions are given, proceed as follows for maintenance and
repair work.
Procedure:
• Park the machine on solid and level ground.
• Bring all control levers to neutral position.
• Move the safety lever up.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
• Turn the engine off and pull the ignition key.

• Actuate the control levers several times to relieve the pressure in the servo
lines.
• Bring all control levers to neutral position.
14. Before working on the hydraulic circuit, with the engine turned off and with the
ignition key in contact position, move all pilot controls (joysticks and pedals) in
both directions to relieve the servo pressure and the remaining back pressures
in the working circuits. Then release the internal tank pressure.
15. Before leaving the operator’s seat, always move the safety lever up.
16. Secure all loose parts on the machine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
40 PR734-1481 / 13743
Safety guidelines
17. Never operate a machine without a complete walk around inspection. Check if
all warning signs are on the machine and if they are all legible.
18. Observe all signs with danger and safety notes.
19. For special applications, this machine must be equipped with specific safety
devices. In this case, use the machine only if they are installed and func-
tioning.
20. Never make any changes or additions and modifications on the machine,
which could affect the safety, without obtaining explicit approval from the
manufacturer / supplier. This also applies to the installation and adjustment of
safety devices and safety valves as well as to any welding on load carrying
parts.
21. Avoid staying near the running Diesel engine. Persons with a pacemaker may
not stay near a running Diesel engine (minimum distance 50 cm).
22. Do not touch current carrying components on the electrical connection of sole-
noid valve controlled injection pumps (Unit Pumps) when the Diesel engine is
running.
2.4.2 Safety guidelines for crushing and burn prevention

1. Never work underneath the attachment as long as it is not safely resting on the
ground or properly supported.
2. Never use damaged or insufficient tackle (such as cables, chains, ..).
Always wear work gloves when handling wire cables.
3. When working on the attachment, never align bores with your fingers, always
use a suitable alignment tool.
4. When the engine is running, make sure that no objects touch the fan. Any
objects falling or protruding into the fan will be thrown out or destroyed and
can damage the fan.
5. Avoid skin contact with hot surfaces and fluids. There is a danger of burns.
6. Check the coolant level only after the cap of the expansion tank is cool enough
to touch. Turn the cap carefully to relieve the pressure.
7. At or near operating temperature, the engine and the hydraulic oil are hot. Do
not allow the hot oil or oil-bearing parts to touch the skin.
8. Always wear safety glasses and work gloves when handling batteries. Avoid
sparks and open flames.
9. Never permit anyone to hand guide the attachment into proper position.
10. Check if the open door position of the engine compartment door is ensured by
the gas cylinder.
If the function is not ensured, then the problem must be remedied immediately.
11. Before operating the machine, close and lock all engine compartment doors
and covers.
12. Never lay underneath the machine unless the machine is properly and safely
supported.
2.4.3 Safety guidelines for fire and explosion prevention

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
1. The engine must be turned off when refueling.

In addition, the heater must also be turned off before refueling.
2. Do not smoke and avoid open flames when refueling and where batteries are
charged.
3. Always start the engine as described in the “ Operating instructions ”
4. Check the electrical system. Correct any defects, such as loose connections,
chafed wiring or burnt out fuses and bulbs immediately.
5. Never store flammable fluids on the machine except in appropriate storage
tanks.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 41
Safety guidelines
6. Regularly inspect all lines, hoses and fittings for leaks and damage. Repair
any leaks immediately and replace damaged components.
Any oil escaping from leaks can easily cause a fire.
7. Be certain that all clamps and protective guards are properly installed to
prevent vibration, rubbing and heat build up.
8. Starter fluid (ether) is especially flammable! Never use cold start ether near
heat sources, open flames (for example cigarettes) or in insufficiently venti-
lated areas.
9. Never use the flame glow system or preheat systems when using cold start
ether! (Danger of explosion)
10. Know the location of fire extinguishers, make sure you know how to use them
properly and check out the location of where to report a fire and inform your-
self about fire fighting capabilities before you start to work.
2.4.4 Safety guidelines for machine start up

1. Before starting the machine, always perform a thorough walk around inspec-
tion.
2. Visually check the machine for loose bolts, cracks, wear, leaks and intentional
damage.
3. Never start or operate a damaged machine.
4. Make sure to correct any problems immediately.
5. Make sure that all hoods and covers are closed and locked. Check if all
warning and reference signs are on the machine.
6. Clean all windows and mirrors, secure all doors and windows to prevent inad-
vertent movements.
7. As a rule, enter and leave the operator's cab from the left rear over the chain,
using the provided handles.
8. Make sure that no one works on or under the machine. Warn all persons in the
surrounding area on the jobsite before operating the machine.
9. After entering the cab, adjust the operator’s seat, the mirrors, the arm rests
and the seatbelt so that you can work comfortably.
10. The noise protection devices on the machine must be in protective position
during operation.
11. Never operate the machine without the operator's cab or canopy.
2.4.5 Safety guidelines for start up

1. Before starting the machine, check all indicator lights and instrument for proper
function. Bring all control levers into neutral position.
2. Before starting the engine, alert any nearby personnel that the machine is
being started by sounding the horn.
3. Start the machine only from the operator’s seat.
4. If no other instructions were issued, start the engine as outlined in the Oper-
ating instructions.
5. Start the engine and check all indicators, gauges, instruments and controls.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
6. When operating in enclosed spaces, run the engine only if there is sufficient
ventilation. If necessary, open doors and windows to ensure sufficient fresh air
supply.
7. Bring the engine and the hydraulic oil to operating temperature, low oil temper-
atures cause the controls to be sluggish.
8. Check that the control for the attachment functions properly.
9. Move the machine carefully into an open area and check all travel functions,
check travel brake, the steering function as well as the turn signals and lights.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
42 PR734-1481 / 13743
Safety guidelines
2.4.6 Safety guidelines for working

1. Before starting to work, familiarize yourself with the peculiarities of the job site,
as well as the special regulations and warning signals. Part of the surrounding
area includes, for example, the obstacles in the working or traffic area, the
load bearing capacity of the ground and special protection required to secure
the job site from public highway traffic.
2. Always keep a safe distance to overhangs, edges, embankments and unstable
ground.
3. Be particularly cautious of changing ground conditions, unfavorable visibility
and changing weather.
4. Familiarize yourself with the location of power lines on the jobsite and work
particularly careful in their vicinity. If necessary, inform the responsible authori-
ties.
5. Maintain a safe distance from electrical overhead lines. When working near
electrical overhead lines, do not allow the attachment too come close to the
wires.
There is a Danger to life!
Inform yourself about required safety distances.
6. If you do touch a high voltage power line, proceed as follows:
• Do not leave the machine!
• If possible, move the machine a sufficient distance away from the danger
zone.
• Warn all personnel in the surrounding area not to come close to the
machine and not to touch the machine.
• Instruct someone to turn the electric power off.
• Do not leave the machine until you are assured that the electric wire, which
has been touched or damaged is no longer energized and the power has
been turned off!
7. Before moving the machine or working with the machine, always make sure
that the equipment is safely secured.
8. When travelling on public roads, highways or properties, always observe the
valid traffic regulations and, if necessary, first bring the machine into proper
condition to meet federal and local highway standards.
9. Always turn on the lights if visibility is poor or as dusk approaches.
10. It is strictly prohibited for anyone to ride along on the machine.
11. Operate the machine only when seated and with the seatbelt fastened.
12. In the even that the machine should tip over, remain seated with the seatbelt
secured. Experience has shown that it is safer to remain in the cab in the
event of an overturn.
13. Report any functional problems or defects, make sure that all necessary
repairs are completed immediately.
14. Personally make sure that no one is endangered by moving the machine.
15. Never leave the operator’s seat as long as the machine is still moving.
16. Never leave the machine unattended while the engine is running.
17. When moving loads, keep the load as close as possible to the ground.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
18. The maximum permissible incline and side slope of the machine depends on
the installed attachment as well as on the ground conditions!
19. Avoid any working movements which could cause the machine to tip over.
However, if the machine does begin to tip or slide, lower the attachment imme-
diately and turn the machine downhill. If possible, always work downhill or
uphill, never sideways on a slope.
20. Always move slowly and carefully on rocky or slippery ground or on a slope.
21. Always adapt the travel speed to the working conditions.
22. Never travel on slopes which exceed the maximum permissible gradeability.
23. Travel downhill only at low travel speed, maximum 4 km/h, to prevent loss of
control over the machine. The engine must run at high idle speed and the

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 43
Safety guidelines
speed must be reduced by selecting the lower speed range. Never switch into
the lower travel speed range while already driving downhill, always switch
before approaching the slope.
24. For terrain which is difficult to gain an overview of and whenever necessary,
ask for assistance of a guide. Have only one person signal you.
25. Danger of accidents due to restriction of vision for large machines! Take suit-
able measures to ensure a safe working application of the machine on the
construction site.
26. Only permit experienced personnel to secure loads and signal the crane oper-
ator. The signaller must position himself within the view of the operator or be in
voice contact with him.
2.4.7 Safety guidelines for turning the machine off

1. Park the machine only on firm and level ground. If it becomes necessary to
park the machine on a grade, it must be properly blocked and secured with
wedges to prevent any unintentional movement.
2. Lower the raised load to the ground.
3. Bring all control levers to neutral position, place the safety lever up and turn
the engine off according to the Operating instructions before leaving the opera-
tor’s seat.
4. Lock the machine, remove all keys and secure the machine to prevent unau-
thorized use and vandalism.
5. Never park the machine in such a way as to block access to entrances, exits,
ramps, fire hydrants, etc.
2.4.8 Safety guidelines for transporting the machine

1. Use only suitable transport devices and lifting devices with sufficient load
carrying capacity.
2. Park the machine on level ground and block the chains or wheels with
wedges.
3. If necessary, remove parts of the attachment for the duration of transport.
4. When loading a machine on a transport vehicle, be sure that the loading ramp
incline is less than 30° and is covered with wooden planks to prevent slipping.
5. Before moving onto the ramp, clean the chains or wheels of the machine,
remove any snow, ice or mud.
6. Align the machine with the loading ramp.
7. Use a guide to signal the machine operator. Drive onto the ramp and onto the
transport vehicle very carefully
8. Secure the machine and the remaining parts with chains and wedges to
prevent them from slipping.
9. Relieve pressure from hydraulic lines and hoses, remove the ignition key, lock
the cab and all covers before leaving the machine.
10. Carefully check out the transporting route beforehand, especially in regards to
width, height and weight limitations.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
11. Check that there is enough clearance underneath all electrical lines, bridges,
underpasses and in tunnels.
12. During the unloading procedure, proceed with the same caution as during the
loading procedure.
Procedure:
• Remove all chains and wedges. Start the engine as outlined in the oper-
ating instructions.
• Carefully drive off the loading platform down the ramp.
• Have another person guide and signal you.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
44 PR734-1481 / 13743
Safety guidelines
2.4.9 Safety guidelines for towing the machine

1. Always follow the correct procedure according to the instructions in the Oper-
ating instructions, refer to section “Tow the machine”.
2. The machine may only be towed in exceptional circumstances, for example to
move the machine from a dangerous area for repair.
3. Before pulling or towing, check all towing and pull devices for safety and
stability.
4. The cable or the rod, which is used to tow the machine must be adequate to
pull the machine and must be connected to the appropriate bores and towing
devices. Damage or accidents which occur during towing of the machine
cannot be covered by the manufacturer's guarantee under any circumstances.
5. Notes for towing with a rope:
• Make sure that no one is near the tensioned rope during the towing proce-
dure.
• Keep the rope tight and avoid kinks.
• Tighten the rope carefully.
A sudden jerk can cause a slack rope to snap.
6. During the towing procedure, keep within the required transport position, the
permissible speed and distance.
7. When returning the machine to operation, proceed only as outlined in the
Operating instructions.
8. After the towing procedure, be certain to return the machine to series condi-
tion.
2.4.10 Safety guidelines for maintenance

1. Never perform any maintenance or repairs for which you are not qualified or
you do not understand.
2. Observe the stated intervals or time periods for repeat checks and inspections
as outlined in the operating instructions. Always use appropriate tools to carry
out maintenance work.
3. The chart in these operating instructions defines exactly who must or may
carry out which type of work. The operator may only carry out work marked in
the maintenance and inspection schedule with “by maintenance personnel”.
The remaining tasks may only be carried out by expert technicians with appro-
priate training.
4. Spare parts must meet the technical requirements set forth by the manufac-
turer. This is always ensured by using Original spare parts. Spare parts, which
do not meet the technical requirements of the manufacturer can impact the
safety and function of the machine.
5. Always wear safe work clothing when maintaining the machine. For certain
work, safety glasses and work gloves are required, in addition to a hard hat
and safety shoes.
6. Keep unauthorized personnel away from the machine during maintenance.
7. Secure a wide-ranging area for service, as necessary.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
8. Inform the operator before carrying out any special task or maintenance work.
Appoint one supervisory person.
9. If not otherwise noted in these operating instructions, carry out all maintenance
work on the machine on firm and level ground, with the engine turned off.
10. The operator’s platform may only be tilted when the machine is at a standstill
and the engine is turned off! When tilting the operator’s platform forward or
backward, there may be no personnel within the tilt range. Work under the
tilted operator's platform may only be carried out if the machine is at a stand-
still and after placing the safety support bar. The machine may NOT be started

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 45
Safety guidelines
or driven with a tilted operator’s platform. Leave the safety lever in the upper-
most position!
11. During maintenance and repairs, make sure you always tighten any loosened
screw connections.
12. If it becomes necessary to remove any safety devices during set up, mainte-
nance and repairs, the safety devices which were removed must be reinstalled
immediately after completion of the maintenance and repair work and then be
inspected for proper function.
13. Before any maintenance and repair work, especially when working under the
machine, attach an easily visible warning sign “DO NOT TURN ON” on the
ignition switch. Pull the ignition key off.
14. Before any maintenance and repairs, clean the machine, especially connec-
tions and fittings to remove oil, fuel or cleaning substances. Never use aggres-
sive cleaning substances. Use only lint-free cleaning cloths.
15. To clean the machine, never use flammable cleaning fluids.
16. Before any welding, cutting and grinding, clean the machine and surrounding
area of dust and flammable substances and assure adequate ventilation.
• Otherwise there is a DANGER OF EXPLOSION!
17. Before cleaning with water, steam (high pressure cleaner) or other cleaning
fluids, cover / tape off all openings whose safety and function could be affected
by infiltration of water, steam or cleaning fluid.
Electrical motors, switch boxes and battery compartments are especially
endangered.
Further procedure:
• Make sure that the temperature sensor of the fire warning system and the
fire extinguisher do not come in contact with hot cleaning fluids when
cleaning the operator's cab. Otherwise they could trigger the fire extin-
guishing system.
• After cleaning, completely remove the covers and tapes.
• After cleaning the machine, check all fuel, engine oil, hydraulic oil lines for
leaks, loose connections, chafing and damage.
• Fix any defects immediately.
18. Adhere to the product safety instructions issued for handling of oils, greases
and other chemical substances.
19. Ensure safe and environmentally friendly disposal of operating and service
fluids as well as exchange parts.
20. Be very careful when handling any hot components or service fluids on the
machine as there is a danger of burns and scalding.
21. Operate combustion engines and fuel operated heaters only in sufficiently
ventilated areas. Before starting the machine in a closed area, make sure the
ventilation is sufficient. Always follow all regulations valid for the current job
site.
22. Perform any welding, cutting or grinding work on the machine only if this work
has been explicitly authorized, as there can be a danger of fire or explosion.
23. The operator’s cab windows are made of safety glass. Damaged operator’s
cab windows must always be replaced immediately.
• Only safety glass may be used for the operator’s cab windows.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
• Use only Original Liebherr spare parts.

24. Do not attempt to lift heavy parts. Use suitable lifting devices with sufficient
load carrying capacity.
Procedure:
• When replacing individual parts and larger components, attach and secure
them carefully to the lifting devices to avoid any danger.
• Use only suitable and technically sound lifting devices as well as load
tackle with sufficient load carrying capacity.
• Do not allow anyone to work or remain underneath suspended loads.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
46 PR734-1481 / 13743
Safety guidelines
25. Do not use damaged or insufficiently sized ropes or cables. Always wear work
gloves when handling wire cables.
ator. The guide must position himself within view of the operator or be in voice
contact with him.
27. When working overhead during installation work, use appropriate safe access
ladders and working platforms. Never use machine parts as access aids. Wear
a harness / anti-fall guards when working in great heights. Keep all handles,
steps, railings, platforms, ladders free of dirt, ice and snow.
28. When working on the attachment, make sure it is safely supported. Never use
metal on metal support.
29. Never lay underneath the machine unless the machine is properly and safely
supported with wooden beams.
30. Always support the machine in such a way that any shifting weight will not
endanger the stability of the machine and avoid metal to metal contact.
31. Only authorized, especially trained personnel may work on the travel gears,
brake and steering system.
32. If the machine must be repaired while parked on a slope, the track chains or
wheels must be blocked with wedges to prevent any movement. Bring the
working attachment into maintenance position.
33. Only authorized personnel with specialized training and experience in
hydraulics may work on the hydraulic system.
34. Wear protective gloves when checking for leaks. Fluid escaping from a small
hole can have enough pressure to penetrate the skin.
35. Never loosen any hydraulic oil lines or fittings before the attachment has been
lowered and the engine has been turned off. Then, with the ignition key in
contact position and the safety lever in operating position, actuate all pilot
controls (joysticks and pedals) in both directions to relieve the servo pressure
and the back pressures in the working circuits, and relieve the internal tank
pressure by releasing the breather screw.
36. Regularly inspect all hydraulic oil lines, hoses and fittings for leaks and exter-
nally visible damage. Fix any defects immediately. Oil spray can lead to inju-
ries and fires.
37. Before beginning any repairs, be sure that all air and hydraulic pressures are
relieved in any of the systems and pressure lines you need to gain access to.
38. Route and install hydraulic hoses and air pressure lines properly. Do not mix
up the connections. All fittings, including length and quality of hose lines must
match the specified requirements.
Use only Liebherr replacement parts.
39. Replace hydraulic hoses and lines in regular intervals, as stated, even if no
safety relevant defects can be seen.
40. Only qualified electricians or trained personnel under the guidance and super-
vision of a licensed electrician may work on the electrical equipment of the
machine, according to the electro-technical rules and regulations.
41. Only use Original fuses with the correct amperage. In case of problems in the
electric energy supply, turn the machine off immediately.
42. Inspect and check the electronic equipment on the machine regularly. Correct
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
any defects, such as loose connections, burnt or chafed wiring or burnt out
fuses and bulbs immediately.
43. If any work is necessary on energized, voltage carrying parts, a second person
must be utilized to disconnect the emergency off or master switch in case a
problem should arise. Rope off the work area off with a red and white safety
chain and a warning sign. Use only insulated tools.
44. When working on high voltage carrying components, turn off the power supply,
then connect the supply cable to the ground and use a grounding rod to
ground these parts, such as the condensers.
45. Check all disconnected parts first if they are really free of voltage, ground them
and then short circuit them. Insulate adjacent, voltage carrying parts.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 47
Safety guidelines
2.4.11 Safety guidelines for welding work on the machine

1. Adhere to the following procedure for welding work on the machine:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Turn the battery master switch off (if present).
• Attach the ground of the welding unit as close as possible to the welding
location.
• Only authorized expert personnel is permitted to carry out welding work.
2.4.12 Safety guidelines for working on the attachment

1. Never work underneath the boom or the hook block as long as they are not
safely resting on the ground or are properly supported.
2. Do not attempt to lift heavy parts. Use suitable lifting devices with sufficient
load carrying capacity.
3. When working with wire cables, always wear gloves!
4. Never loosen any hydraulic oil lines or fittings before the attachment has been
lowered and the engine has been turned off. Then, with the ignition key in
contact position and the safety lever in operating position, actuate all pilot
controls (joysticks and pedals) in both directions to relieve the servo pressure
and the back pressures in the working circuits, and relieve the internal tank
pressure by releasing the breather screw.
5. After completion of all maintenance and repair work, make sure that all lines,
hoses and fittings are properly connected and retightened.
6. Removing and installing steel bolts and pins can be dangerous, metal chips
can cause severe injuries.
Always wear gloves and safety glasses.
If possible, use special tools (such as mandrels, pin pullers, etc.).
2.4.13 Safety guidelines for loading the machine with a crane

1. Lower the working attachment.
2. Bring all control levers into neutral position.
3. Turn the engine off as outlined in the operating instructions and raise the
safety lever before leaving the operator’s seat.
4. Close all doors, covers and hoods on the machine properly.
ator. The signaller must position himself within the view of the operator or be in
voice contact with him.
6. Install shackles and hooks for the suspension to the appropriate and desig-
nated brackets or bore holes on the machine.
7. Make sure the suspension is of sufficient length.
8. Carefully lift the machine.
9. Do not allow anyone to work or remain underneath suspended loads.
10. When returning the machine to operation, proceed only as outlined in the
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Operating instructions.
2.4.14 Safety notes for maintenance of hydraulic hoses and

hose lines
1. Hydraulic lines and hoses may never be repaired! This is strictly prohibited!
2. All hoses, hose lines and fittings must be checked regularly, but at least 1 x
per year for leaks and any externally visible damage! Any damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Oil spray can lead to injuries and fires.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
48 PR734-1481 / 13743
Safety guidelines
3. Even if hoses and hose lines are properly stored and used, they undergo a
natural aging process. For that reason, their service life is limited.
4. Improper storage, mechanical damage and improper use are the most
frequent causes of hose failures.
5. The service life of a hose line may not exceed six years, including a storage
period of a maximum of two years (always check the manufacturer’s date on
the hoses).
6. Using hoses and lines close to the limit ranges of permitted use can shorten
the service life ( for example at high temperatures, frequent working cycles,
extremely high impulse frequencies, multi shift operation).
7. Hoses and lines must be replaced if any of the following conditions are found
during an inspection:
Criteria:
• Damage to the outer layer as far as the intermediate layer (e.g. chafing,
cuts and cracks).
• Brittleness of the outer layer (hose material cracking);
• Deformations, which differ from the natural shape of the hose or hose line,
when under pressure or not under pressure, or in bends, e.g. separation of
layers, blisters or bubble formation;
• Leaks;
• Failure to follow installation instructions;
• Damage or deformation in the hose fittings, which reduce the stability of the
fitting or the connection from hose to fitting;
• Hose slipping out of the fitting;
• Corrosion of the fitting, which reduces function and strength;
• Storage time or service life has been exceeded.
8. When replacing hoses and hose lines, use only Original spare parts.
9. Route and install hoses and hose lines properly. Do not mix up the connec-
tions.
2.4.15 Safety guidelines for maintenance work on machines

with hydro accumulators
1. Only especially trained expert personnel may work on hydro accumulators.
2. Improper mounting and handling of hydro accumulators can cause severe
accidents.
3. Do not operate damaged hydro accumulators.
4. Before working on hydro accumulators, relieve the pressure in the hydraulic
system (hydraulic system including hydraulic tank), as described in these oper-
ating instructions.
5. Do not weld or solder on the hydro accumulator and do not carry out any
mechanical work.
The hydro accumulator can be damaged due to heat exposure and can
rupture due to mechanical treatment. THERE IS A DANGER OF EXPLO-
SION!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
6. Fill the hyrdo accumulator only with nitrogen. When using oxygen or air, there
is a DANGER OF EXPLOSION!
7. The accumulator housing can become hot during operation, there is a danger
of burning.
8. New hydro accumulators must be charged to the required pressure for the
application before use.
9. The operating data (minimum and maximum pressure) is marked permanently
on the hydro accumulators. Make sure that the marks remain visible.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 49
Safety guidelines
2.4.16 Roll over protection (ROPS) and falling object protec-

tion (FOPS)
These are protective devices, which are integrated into the operator’s cab.
To avoid weakening of the roll over or falling object protection, always contact a
Liebherr dealer before making any changes.
Do not attach fire extinguishers, first aid kits, floodlights or similar objects.
Welding of mounting parts or drilling holes could weaken the structure.
Contact your Liebherr dealer for such work.
1. Any change, which is not explicitly approved by Liebherr voids the certification
of the roll over and falling object protection.
Damage to the structure can also be caused by a roll over accident, falling
objects, etc.
2.4.17 Equipment and attachment parts

1. Equipment and attachment parts made by other manufacturers or those which
were not approved by Liebherr for installation or attachment may not be
installed on the machine without prior written approval by Liebherr.
2. Liebherr must be provided with the required technical documentation
necessary for this purpose.
2.4.18 Protection from vibrations

1. The vibration impact on mobile construction machinery is usually the result of
the manner of utilization. Especially the following parameters have a significant
influence:
Terrain conditions: Unevenness and potholes;
Operating techniques: Speed, steering, braking, control of operating elements
of the machine during travel as well as working.
2. The machine operator determines the vibration impact to a great part, since he
himself selects the speed, the gear ratio, the working manner and the travel
route. This results in a wide range of various vibration impacts for the same
machine type.
3. The full body vibration impact for the machine operator can be reduced if the
following recommendations are observed :
Select the appropriate machine, equipment parts and auxiliary devices for the
corresponding tasks.
Use a machine equipped with the appropriate seat (i.e. for earth moving
machines, for example hydraulic excavators, a seat which meets EN ISO
7096).
4. Keep the seat in good order and adjust it as follows:
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The seat adjustment and the suspension should be made according to the
weight and the size of the operator.
Check the suspension and the adjustment mechanism regularly and make
sure that the characteristics of the seat remains as specified by the seat manu-
facturer.
5. Check the maintenance condition of the machine, especially regarding: Tire
pressure, brakes, steering, mechanical connections, etc.
6. Do not steer, brake, accelerate and shift or move and load the attachment of
the machine in a jerky manner.
7. Match the machine speed to the travel route to avoid vibration impacts.
Decrease the speed when driving on pathless terrain.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
50 PR734-1481 / 13743
Safety guidelines
Drive around obstacles and avoid very impassable terrain.

8. Keep the quality of the terrain where the machine is working and travelling in
good order:
Remove large rocks and obstacles;
Fill furrows and holes.
To establish and retain suitable terrain conditions, keep machines available
and allow for sufficient time.
9. Travel longer distances (i.e. on public roads) with suitable (medium) speed.
10. For machines, which are frequently used for travel, utilize special auxiliary
systems for travel (if installed), which reduce the vibration for this application.
If such auxiliary systems are not available, regulate the speed to keep the
machine from "rocking".
2.4.19 See and be seen
Field of vision
You as the machine operator probably perceive the most information for your work
visually. Only if there is sufficient visibility while travelling and working can you mini-
mize possible dangers for you and others.
Since there is no direct view onto all areas in the surrounding, visual aids (such as
mirrors and cameras) are installed on the machine. These visual aids are to be
utilized for the areas around the machine which are not directly visible.
WARNING
Some installations and equipment can limit the visibility of the machine operator.
Danger of accident!
u Pay attention to limitations in the visibility field and to blind spots.
u Use the aid of a guide if necessary.
Observe national regulations regarding visibility in the operator’s cab. For countries
within the European Economic Area, the Standard ISO 5006:2006 describes the
Test and evaluation methods for the visibility field of the machine operator. The visi-
bility field is tested in this case with the standard equipment. Changes on the
machine, such as installation or modification of components may not impact the
visibility field. When changes impact the visibility field, then a test according to ISO
5006:2006 or the regulations valid on the job site must be carried out. Appropriate
measures are to be taken, depending on the test result. The machine operator
must be informed about the changes.
Measures before and during operation

1. Make sure that persons establish contact with the machine operator before
they approach the machine.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
2. Check visibility aids for function, cleanliness and correct adjustment.

3. Adjust visibility aids in such a way that the best possible all around visibility is
ensured.
4. Clean visibility aids and windows in the operator’s cab immediately if dirt
affects the visibility.
5. Have defective visibility aids repaired or replaced immediately.
6. Do not use sun visors if they limit visibility.
7. Always monitor the surrounding to recognize potential dangers in time.
8. Avoid driving backward, if possible.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 51
Safety guidelines
9. Prefer direct visibility: plan the work in such a way that the visibility onto the
work area is not limited by obstacles.
10. As a rule, always work with a guide for tasks with limited visibility or defective
visual aids. Agree on hand signals, for difficult tasks use additional voice
contact (for example via radio).
11. Use lights in bad visibility conditions and according to the valid regulations.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
52 PR734-1481 / 13743
3 Control, operation
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 53
Control, operation Operator's manual
Operating and control elements
3.1 Operating and control elements
3.1.1 Operator's cab
Fig. 35: Interior view of operator's cab

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
1 Blade control lever 5 Operating elements Heater 8 Nozzles for heater

and air conditioning system
2 Ripper control lever 6 Speed control 9 Safety lever
3 Start panel 7 Joystick 10 Instrument panel front
4 Interior lighting 7.1 Speed reduction pedal
(Optional equipment)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
54 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Control, operation
Fig. 36: Interior view of operator's cab

11 Windshield wiper Rear 16 Armrests 21 Windshield wiper Front
window window
12 Floodlight rear 17 Door latch 22 Floodlight front
13 Glove compartment 18 Windshield wiper Doors 23 Inside mirror
14 Seatbelt 19 Door lock
15 Operator's seat 20 Compartment for operating
instructions
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 55
3.1.2 Control elements on the operator's platform
Fig. 37: Control elements on the instrument panel
30 LC display
Shows:
– the travel speed
– the Diesel engine rpm
– the Service codes
– the towing mode
– the fill mode.
If a Service code appears, take the machine out of service properly and put it back
into service. If the Service code in the LC display does not disappear, contact Lieb-
herr Service immediately.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The LC display is deactivated when the ignition is turned on. The LC display is acti-
vated by placing the safety lever down or by starting the Diesel engine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
56 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 39: LC display Travel speed - rpm

1 Display of travel speed in km/hr. 2 Rpm display
Fig. 40: LC display Service codes

3 Display Service code
Fig. 41: LC display Towing mode

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
4 LC display Towing mode

“TOWING”
In towing mode, the word “TOWING” appears in the LC display.
31 Warning light Operator's cab

The warning light lights up or blinks:
– in case of increased Diesel engine coolant temperature
– in case of a drop in Diesel engine oil pressure
– in case of a drop in pump replenishing pressure

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 57
– when the ignition switch is in contact position as long as the Diesel engine is not
running
If the warning light - Operator's cab lights up, turn the Diesel engine off and remedy
the problem.
33 Coolant temperature display

Shows the coolant temperature of the Diesel engine.
If the temperature of the coolant is constantly above 100°C: Turn the Diesel engine
off and remedy the problem (for example clean the cooler, add coolant, check for
leaks or check the water pump).
34 Fuel display
Shows the contents of the Diesel fuel tank.
To reduce the formation of condensation in the tank, keep the fuel level as high as
possible.
35 Operating hour meter

Displays the operating hours.
The operating hour meter serves as the basis for timely adherence to the inspec-
tion schedule.
Fig. 46: Indicator lights
40 Indicator light Battery charge

Bulb color: red
Turns off after the Diesel engine is running.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
– Lights up, for example, if the V-belt for the alternator is broken.
If the indicator light lights up, turn the Diesel engine off and remedy the problem.
41 Indicator light Pump replenishing pressure

Bulb color: red
– Lights up in case of a drop in pump replenishing pressure.
If the indicator light lights up, turn the Diesel engine off immediately and remedy
the problem.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
58 PR734-1481 / 13743
42 Indicator light Fan control

Bulb color: red
– Blinks from a charge air temperature of 80°C
Turn the Diesel engine off immediately and remedy the problem.
– Lights up from a charge air temperature of 86°C
Turn the Diesel engine off immediately and remedy the problem. .
If the indicator light does not turn off or lights up again: Contact Liebherr Service
– Blinks from a hydraulic oil temperature of 96°C
Turn the machine off and clean the hydraulic oil cooler.
– Lights up from a hydraulic oil temperature of 101°C
– Blinks from a coolant temperature of 100°C
Turn the machine off and remedy the problem (for example clean the cooler, add
coolant, check for leaks or check the water pump).
– Lights up from a coolant temperature of 105°C
43 Indicator light Electronic

Bulb color: red
– Lights up in case of problems in the electronic system.
In addition, a Service code is issued in the LC display. Depending on the error, the
machine is switched to emergency operation and the travel drive is stopped.
If the indicator light lights up: Turn the machine off and put it back into service prop-
erly.
– Blinks if an error occurs in travel operation.
A Service code is issued in the LC display. Depending on the error which occurred,
the machine is switched to emergency operation; the machine is then only opera-
tional on a limited basis.
The machine can be operated in the meantime. Contact Liebherr Service.
– Blinks in case of failure of the speed reduction pedal.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
In case of a failure of the speed reduction pedal, the indicator light - Electronic
blinks as well as the warning light - Operator's cab.
The machine can be operated in the meantime. Contact Liebherr Service and
repair the speed reduction pedal promptly.
44 Indicator light Hydraulic oil temperature

Bulb color: red
– Lights up if the hydraulic oil temperature is too high.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 59
If the indicator light lights up, turn the machine off.

Clean the hydraulic oil cooler.
45 Indicator light Travel gear - duo cone (slipring) area,

left
Bulb color: red
– Lights up if the oil level in the duo cone (slipring) area is too low.
– Lights up if the ignition key is in contact position for approx. 3 sec. (Self-check).
If the indicator light lights up, turn the machine off, check the travel gear externally
for leaks.
Contact Liebherr Service.
– For intermediate continued operation, bring the oil level to normal level.
46 Indicator light Travel gear - duo cone (slipring) area,

right
Bulb color: red
– Lights up if the oil level in the duo cone (slipring) area is too low.
– Lights up if the ignition key is in contact position for approx. 3 sec. (Self-check).
If the indicator light lights up, turn the machine off, check the travel gear externally
for leaks.
Contact Liebherr Service.
– For intermediate continued operation, bring the oil level to normal level.
47 Indicator light Preheat system

Bulb color: yellow
– Lights up if the ignition key is in preheat position for max. 20 sec.
– Blinks when the Diesel engine is ready to start.
The preheat time depends on the coolant and charge air temperature and can take
from 1 second up to maximum 20 seconds.
After the indicator light turns off, the Diesel engine can be started by turning the
ignition key to starting position.
48 Indicator light Parking brake

Bulb color: yellow
– Lights up if the parking brake is applied.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
– Lights up if the safety lever is raised.

– Lights up in case of a drop in pump replenishing pressure.
49 Indicator light Air filter contamination

Bulb color: yellow
– Lights up if the air filter is very dirty.
Carry out air filter maintenance.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
60 PR734-1481 / 13743
50 Indicator light Return filter

Bulb color: yellow
– Lights up if the hydraulic oil return filter insert is dirty (hydraulic oil at operating
temperature).
Carry out maintenance of the hydraulic oil return filter insert.
54 Indicator light Diesel engine problem

Bulb color: red
– Lights up in case of a problem with the Diesel engine.
At the same time, a service code is shown in the display in the area of ER-8xxx.
If the indicator light lights up, turn the machine off and put it back into service prop-
erly.
Do not operate the machine in the meantime.
Error code ER-8002 indicates insufficient engine oil pressure.
– Turn the Diesel engine off immediately and remedy the problem.
62 Warning buzzer
Fig. 59: Warning buzzer
The warning buzzer sounds:

– in case of increased Diesel engine coolant temperature,
– in case of a drop in Diesel engine oil pressure,
– in case of a drop in pump replenishing pressure,
– if the ignition switch is in contact position for approx. 1 -2 sec. (Self test -
buzzer).
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
If the warning buzzer sounds: Turn the Diesel engine off and remedy the problem.
71 Indicator light Fuel water separator

Bulb color: yellow
– Lights up if the water ratio in the fuel water separator is too high.
– If the indicator light lights up: Carry out maintenance of the water separator!
An error code (ER-80xx) is shown in the LC - display.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 61
3.1.3 Control elements on the operator's platform
52 Horn button
Fig. 62: Horn button
– The horn is activated by pushing the button.
53 Scroll key
Fig. 64: Scroll key
– The service codes can be called up by pressing the scroll key, with the starter
key in contact position The Service codes are shown in the LC display.
Maximum 10 Service codes are shown in the display. The current service code
moves the previous one back by one place. After 30 seconds, the display
returns automatically to standard display (speed stage and RPM), or it can be
changed manually to standard display by pressing the scroll key for 3 seconds.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
62 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 66: Right roof console
55 Switch Windshield wiper, front

Stage 1: Turn on and off
Stage 2: Button windshield washer system
56 Switch Windshield wiper, rear

Stage 2: Button - windshield washer system for rear window and side window
57 Switch Windshield wiper, left door

58 Switch Windshield wiper, right door

59 Switch Windshield wiper - intermittent / washer

system
Stage 1: Continuous wipe
– The windshield wiper which was turned on with the switches 55, 56, 57 and 58
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
is changed from intermittent wipe to continuous wipe.

Stage 2: Button – windshield washer system and dry wipe

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 63
60 Starter switch
Fig. 72: Starter switch
“STOP” position
Contact position
Start position
Park position
61 Emergency off button
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 77: Emergency off button
The machine stops immediately when the emergency off button is pressed.
– The attachment can still be moved.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
64 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 79: Right roof console
62 Switch Floodlight Hoist cylinder

Turn on and off
Press the switch to turn the floodlights on the hoist cylinders on or off.
63 Knob Windshield wiper, intermittent control

– With the knob, the timing for intermittent wipe can be regulated (3 stage
control).
64 Switch Lights, front

Turn on and off
The lights on the front of the operator's cab turn on or off after actuating the switch.
65 Switch Lights, rear

Turn on and off
The lights on the rear of the operator's cab turn on or off after actuating the switch.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 83: Roof console left
66 Air conditioning master switch

– The air conditioning system is turned on or off by pressing the button.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 65
67 Operation of heater / air conditioner

– Location of operating elements. (For more information see: 3.2.8 Heater, venti-
lation, page 78) .
68 Radio
– The operation of the radio is described in the separate radio operating manual.
70 Button Towing mode
Fig. 84: Roof console, right
– To activate the towing mode.
3.1.4 Display Hydraulic oil temperature

(Special equipment)
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 86: Display Hydraulic oil temperature
36 Display Hydraulic oil temperature

– Shows the hydraulic oil temperature of the machine.
If the oil temperature of the machine is constantly above 95 °C: Turn the Diesel
engine off and remedy the problem (for example clean the oil cooler).

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
66 PR734-1481 / 13743
3.1.5 Hydraulic oil level indicator

(Special equipment)
The hydraulic oil level indicator monitors the hydraulic oil level electronically.
Fig. 87: Hydraulic oil level indicator
Bulb color: red

– Lights up if the hydraulic oil level is too low. In addition, the warning light opera-
tor's cab lights up and a buzzer sounds.
If the indicator light lights up: Turn the Diesel engine off and remedy the problem.
Check the hydraulic system for leaks.
The electrical system of the hydraulic oil level indicator is protected with fuse F29.
Fuse Value Unit Description / Function

F 29 3 A Hydraulic oil level indicator
(SI)
Tab. 10
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 67
Operation
3.2 Operation
3.2.1 Entry
Always enter and leave the machine using the ascending aids provided.
Clean the steps and tracks before access and check them for proper condition.
Always enter and leave the operator's cab through the left-hand operator's cab
door.
Familiarize yourself with the emergency exit on the right-hand side. See section
“Emergency exit”.
Fig. 88: Entering and leaving the operator's cab
WARNING
Risk of injury due to falling or jumping off the machine!
u To enter and leave, use only the steps, ladders and handrails provided.
u Never jump off the machine.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unintended movements of the machine!
u When entering or exiting, never use the control levers or joysticks as handholds.
u Enter and leave the machine at the front left over the push frame and the tracks.
3.2.2 Emergency exit

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Enter and leave the machine always through the left operator's cab door.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
68 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 89: Emergency exit
The right operator's cab door is intended as an emergency exit and may therefore
only be used in emergency situations.
Fig. 90: Open the right operator's cab door
Before operating the machine, check if the operator's cab can be exited without
restrictions through the right operator's cab door.
u Open the operator's cab door: Turn the lever 1 on the door lock upward.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 91: Safety lever park position
u Before leaving the operator's cab, move the safety lever 1 up.
w The indicator light travel gear brake lights up.
3.2.3 Door lock

The operator’s cab doors are held in closed position by the door lock.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 69
Operation
Open the operator's cab door from the inside
Fig. 92: Open the operator's cab door
u Push the lever 1 on the door lock up.
Door latch
The fully opened operator's cab doors are held in this position by the door latch 1.
Fig. 93: Unlock the door latch
u Unlock the door latch: Push the lever 1 down.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
70 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Operator's seat
3.2.4 Operator's seat with mechanic suspension
Fig. 94: Main components and adjustment elements

1 Backrest 4 Lever Weight adjustment
2 Lever Backrest adjustment 5 Knob Height adjustment
3 Lever Horizontal adjustment 6 Seat surface
Adjust the ergonomic seat position individually

The operator is provided with the greatest possible seating comfort through indi-
vidual adjustment of the operator's seat.
Adjust the operator's seat horizontally

The forward or backward adjustment can be made via the lever 3 on the front of
the operator’s seat.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 95: Adjust the operator's seat horizontally

3 Lever Horizontal adjustment
u Pull the lever 3 in direction of the arrow.
u Adjust the operator's seat horizontally and release the lever.
Adjust the seat height

The adjustment is made with the knob 5 on the front of the operator's seat.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 71
Operation
Fig. 96: Adjust the seat height

5 Knob Height adjustment
Bring the seat into the desired position by turning the knob 5 in or against clock-
wise direction.
u Set the seat higher: Turn the knob in clockwise direction (+).
u Set the seat lower: Turn the knob in counterclockwise direction (-).
Adjust the backrest

The incline of the backrest is adjusted with the lever 2 on the left side of the opera-
tor's seat.
Fig. 97: Adjust the backrest

2 Lever Backrest adjustment
u Lift the lever 2.
u Move the backrest to the desired incline and release the lever.
Adjust the seat suspension

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The seat suspension can be adjusted individually to the body weight of the oper-
ator.
The adjustment is made when the operator's seat is occupied and the machine is
at a standstill by turning the lever 4.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
72 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 98: Adjust the seat suspension
u Set the respective bodyweight with the lever 4.

u Set more weight: Turn the lever in clockwise direction.
u Set less weight: Turn the lever in counterclockwise direction.
u The set weight is shown in the display 11 .
3.2.5 Operator's seat with pneumatic suspension

Fig. 99: Main components and adjustment elements

1 Armrest 7 Lever Incline adjustment front
2 Armrest adjustment 8 Lever Incline adjustment rear
3 Backrest 9 Button Seat suspension
4 Seatbelt 10 Buttons Lumbar support
5 Lever Horizontal adjustment 11 Seat surface
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Adjust the ergonomic seat position individually

The operator is provided with the greatest possible seating comfort through indi-
vidual adjustment of the operator's seat.
Adjust the operator's seat horizontally

The forward or backward adjustment can be made via the lever 5 on the front of
the operator’s seat.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 73
Operation
Fig. 100: Adjust the operator's seat horizontally

5 Lever Horizontal adjustment
u Pull the lever 5 in direction of the arrow.
u Adjust the operator's seat horizontally and release the lever.
Adjust the seat surface incline

The adjustment is made with lever 7 and lever 8 on the right front of the operator's
seat.
Fig. 101: Adjust the seat surface incline

7 Lever Incline adjustment rear 8 Lever Incline adjustment front
u Incline adjustment rear: Lift the lever 7 in direction of the arrow, adjust the
incline and release the lever.
u Incline adjustment front: Lift the lever 8 in direction of the arrow, adjust the
incline and release the lever.
Adjust the seat height

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The adjustment is made with lever 7 and lever 8 on the right side of the operator's
seat.
u Lift lever 7 and lever 8 at the same time.
u Bring the seat to the desired height and release both levers.
Adjust the backrest

The incline of the backrest is adjusted with the lever 6 on the left side of the opera-
tor's seat.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
74 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 102: Adjust the backrest

u Lift the lever 6.
u Move the backrest to the desired incline and release the lever.
Adjust the seat suspension

The seat suspension can be adjusted individually to the body weight of the oper-
ator.
The adjustment is made with the button on the front of the operator's seat.
Move the button in direction “+” or “-” until the desired seat suspension is set.
Fig. 103: Adjust the seat suspension

9 Button Seat suspension
u Set the corresponding bodyweight with the button 9.
Adjust the lumbar support

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The lumbar supports in the backrest can be adjusted individually. Two lumbar
supports are located in the backrest: One in the upper and one in the lower area of
the backrest.
The adjustment is made via button 1 and 2.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 75
Operation
Fig. 104: Adjust the lumbar support
u With the buttons 1 and 2 adjust the lumbar support individually.
3.2.6 Seatbelt
Observe the safety aspects

The operator's cab of the machine is equipped with a roll over protection - ROPS.
The roll over protection ROPS only provides a safety action for the operator
if the seatbelt is worn.
The safety aspects for wearing the seatbelt are described in this chapter.
Fig. 105: Belt requirement
WARNING
Risk of injury if seatbelt is not worn!
If the seatbelt is not correctly worn, then an accident with severe injuries can result
if the machine is suddenly slowed down or stopped!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Always wear the seatbelt before operating the machine.
DANGER
If the seatbelt is not correctly worn, then an accident with severe injuries can result
if the machine tips or rolls over!

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
76 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
u Check the condition, function and attachment of the belt regularly. Replace
damaged parts immediately.
u Wear the seatbelt in such a way that the belt is not twisted.
Fasten the seatbelt

The seatbelt is automatic. It is not necessary to adjust the length of the belt.
Fig. 106: Fasten the belt
u Hold the belt buckle with the right hand and pull the belt slowly from the belt
retainer.
Note
If the belt is pulled out too quickly, then the belt retainer blocks the belt.
u Pull the belt out slowly.
Fig. 107: Close the belt
u Hold the latch lock with the left hand and pull the belt over the body at lap
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
height.
u Insert the latch into the latch lock and check if the latch lock is engaged by
pulling on the latch.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 77
Operation
Release the seatbelt
Fig. 108: Release the belt
u Release the belt: Push the lock on the latch lock downward
3.2.7 Armrests
The height and the horizontal position of the armrests can be adjusted individually.
Fig. 109: Armrest adjustment
u Adjust the height: Loosen the handle 1, adjust the height and the horizontal
position and affix.
u Adjust the incline: Loosen the handle 2, adjust the incline and affix.
3.2.8 Heater, ventilation

The operator’s cab is equipped with a warm water heater. The operator’s cab can
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
also be equipped with an optional air conditioning system.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
78 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 110: Shut off valves
The operator's cab can only be heated if the Diesel engine is at operating tempera-
ture and the shut off valves 1 are open.
The shut off valves are located on the left front on the Diesel engine.
Turn the heater on and off

Heater control elements:
1. Blower knob
2. Temperature knob
Fig. 111: Heater control elements
Make sure that the following prerequisites are met:

q The electrical system of the machine is turned on.
q The nozzles for the desired air flow are open, directed to the body, the front
window, the rear window.
u Turn the heater on: Move the blower knob 1 to stage 1.
w The air is blown via vents into the operator’s cab.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 79
Operation
Fig. 112: Temperature knob
The temperature regulation is stepless.

u Increase the temperature: Turn the temperature knob 2 in clockwise direction.
u Decrease the temperature: Turn the temperature knob 2 in counterclockwise
direction.
Regulate the blower

The blower is turned on or off with the blower knob 1.
Fig. 113: Blower knob
Blower stages:
Stage 0 - position OFF
Stage 1 - weak airflow
Stage 2 - medium airflow
Stage 3 - strong airflow
u Switch the blower knob 1 to the desired stage.
w The air is blown via vents into the operator’s cab.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
3.2.9 Air conditioning system

To ensure the function of the air conditioning system in the long run, we recom-
mend to operate the air conditioning system according to the data in the “Mainte-
nance and inspection schedule”.
During the operation of the air conditioning system, the shaft seal ring in the
compressor is also lubricated. This prevents loss of refrigerant from the
compressor.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
80 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
On damp days, the air conditioning system can dehumidify the air in the cab.
The temperature in the cab becomes more comfortable and the windows will not
fog up.
Turn the air conditioning system on
Fig. 114: Start the Diesel engine
The air conditioning system works only if the Diesel engine is running.
u Start the Diesel engine.
Fig. 115: Air conditioner master switch
u Turn the air conditioner master switch in the roof console on.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 116: Blower knob
u Set the blower knob 1 at least to stage 1.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 81
Operation
Fig. 117: Temperature knob
u Select the desired air temperature with the temperature knob 2 .
The temperature in the operator’s cab is lowered by turning the knob in counter-
clockwise direction.
Due to the integrated de-icing protection, the evaporator will not ice up.
Air conditioning system full power
Fig. 118: Air conditioning system full power
The greatest cooling power in the cab is obtained as follows:

u Turn the temperature knob 2 in counterclockwise direction to the stop.
u Set the highest blower stage.
u Close the windows.
3.2.10 Sliding window

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The sliding windows installed in the operator's cab can be opened by pulling on the
hand and locked in several positions.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
82 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 119: Opening / closing the sliding windows
u Press the push button on the window handle and bring the sliding window into
the desired position.
3.2.11 Interior cab lighting and reading light

The interior light of the cab and the reading light are located in the roof of the oper-
ator's cab.
Fig. 120: Interior cab lighting and reading light
u To turn the interior light on or off: Actuate the switch 1.

u To turn the reading light on or off: Actuate the switch 2.
3.2.12 Inside mirror

The machine is equipped with an inside mirror.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 83
Operation
Fig. 121: Inside mirror
u Adjust the inside mirror to suit before starting to work.
3.2.13 Electrical window wiper and window washer system

The machine is equipped with an electric window wiper and washer system for the
front window and the rear window as well as for the doors.
It consists mainly of the operating elements, the wiper blades, the reservoir and the
nozzles for the window washer fluid.
q Before actuating the windshield wiper and washer system, the electrical system
of the machine is turned on.
q The wiper blades are not frozen to the window.
Operate the window wiper and washer system
Fig. 122: Switch Window wiper and window washer system

1 Switch Window wiper system front 4 Switch Window wiper system rear
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
window window
2 Switch Window wiper system left 5 Switch Intermittent control and
door window washer system
3 Switch Window wiper system right 6 Knob Intermittent control
door
Wipe the window

u Press the switch 1, 2, 3 or 4 .
w The selected window wiper is activated.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
84 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Intermittent wipe, continuous wipe or wash windows

Functions Switch 5:
– Switch pressed on top: Intermittent wipe
– Switch center position: Continuous wipe
– Switch pressed on the bottom (touch function): Wipe function and wash function
u Windshield wiper - intermittent wipe: Move the switch 5 upward.
w The windshield wiper turned on with switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 is switched to
intermittent wipe.
u Windshield wiper continuous wipe: Set the switch 5 to center position.
w The windshield wiper turned on with switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 is switched to
continuous wipe.
u Wash the windows: Press the switch 5 downward and hold.
w The windshield washer fluid is sprayed on the windows via the nozzles.
Set the timing for the intermittent wipe
Fig. 123: Knob intermittent wipe
The timing for intermittent wipe is set in three stages with the knob 6.
u Set the knob to the desired intermittent stage.
3.2.14 Compartment for documentation

Located in the operator’s cab on the front is a compartment for machine documen-
tation.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 124: Compartment

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 85
Operation
u Push the button 1 on the lock and open the cover.

u Place the Operating instructions of the machine in the compartment.
Note
u Always store the Operating instructions in the machine!
3.2.15 Back up warning device

(Special equipment)
Fig. 125: Back-up alarm
The back-up alarm sounds if the travel joystick is moved into position for “reverse
travel”.
Personnel near the machine is warned by the alarm.
The back-up alarm is located in the rear of the machine. The sound level is set
automatically.
Before operating the machine, deflect the travel joystick to position for "reverse
travel" to check the function of the back-up alarm.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 126: Check the back-up alarm
WARNING
Danger of accidents if machine moves in reverse.
When backing up, personnel near the machine can be overlooked.
u Always check personally that no one is being endangered when the machine is
moved, even though a back-up alarm is installed.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
86 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
u Start the machine.

u Move the safety lever down.
u Deflect the travel joystick to the rear.
w The back-up alarm sounds.
3.2.16 Fire extinguisher

(Special equipment)
Location of fire extinguisher

For retrofit installation of a fire extinguisher, a mounting location on the left hand
side, next to the operator’s seat, is available.
Fig. 127: Mounting location for fire extinguisher
u Contact Liebherr for fire extinguisher installation kit.
3.2.17 Rotating beacon 3)

The machine was also prepared in series for the retrofit installation of a rotating
beacon.
u Contact Liebherr for the rotating beacon installation kit.
3.2.18 LiDAT
(Optional)
LiDAT is a data transmission and positioning system for Liebherr machines and
machines of other manufacturers. Based on the latest data transmission tech-
nology, LiDAT supplies information for localization as well as for operation of
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
machines, thus enabling efficient management, optimized job planning and moni-
toring from a distance.
With LiDAT all important machine data can be viewed at any time. The data is
updated several times a day, depending on the subscription, and can be called up
at any time with a web browser. Especially important information, such as leaving
the machine in a predefined zone or messages for certain operating conditions and
job parameters can also be called up.
3) Optional

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 87
Operation
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Operate the machine daily

q Before daily operation, carry out the “maintenance tasks for every 8-10 oper-
ating hours”.
q Sufficient Diesel fuel is available for the daily task. (For more information see:
Add Diesel fuel, page 90)
Bring the machine into operating position
Turn the battery master switch on

The battery master switch is on the right hand side in the battery compartment.
Fig. 128: Battery compartment
u Open the battery compartment door.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 129: Battery master switch
u Set the battery master switch to position “I”.

w The main battery switch is switched on.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
88 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Close the service doors, flaps and hoods
Fig. 130: Lock the doors
u Close all service doors, flaps and hoods and lock them, if possible.
Check the lighting systems
Fig. 131: Light adjustment
u Check the lighting systems.

If necessary:
u Adjust the lights.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 89
Operation
Adjust the mirror
Fig. 132: Inside mirror
u Adjust the inside mirror.
Add Diesel fuel
Fig. 133: Fuel gauge
u Set the starter switch to contact position.

u Check the fuel gauge if there is sufficient Diesel fuel in the tank.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 134: Refueling safety

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
90 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
DANGER
During refueling, there is a danger of fire and explosion!
u Do not smoke and avoid open flames when refueling.
u Refuel only when the Diesel engine is turned off.
u Make sure to observe the safety guidelines for refueling. (For more information
see: 2.4 Safety guidelines, page 40)
Fig. 135: Tank cover
u Remove the tank cover.

Add only clean Diesel fuel.
u Add Diesel fuel only via the integrated strainer.
Note
u To avoid condensation in the fuel tank, add fuel after completion of work or after
a shift change, if possible.
Add Diesel fuel with the refueling pump

The refueling pump is installed on the right hand side in the storage compartment.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 136: Refueling safety

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 91
Operation
DANGER
During refueling, there is a danger of fire and explosion!
u Do not smoke and avoid open flames when refueling.
u Refuel only when the Diesel engine is turned off.
u Make sure to observe the safety guidelines for refueling. (For more information
see: 2.4 Safety guidelines, page 40)
Fig. 137: Access to the refueling pump
u Open the compartment 1 on the right.
Fig. 138: Control section of refueling pump
The control section 3 is removable.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
92 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 139: Suction hose with suction basket

2 Suction hose 8 Suction basket
u Remove the blind couplings on the connection of the refueling pump and on the
suction hose 2.
Fig. 140: Suction hose
u Connect the suction hose 2 on the connection of the refueling pump.
NOTICE
If the machine is refueled without the suction basket, foreign particles can be
drawn in by the refueling pump!
The refueling pump can be thereby damaged.
u Always refuel with the suction basket on the suction hose.
u Place the suction hose 2 with the installed suction basket 8 into the fuel barrel.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 93
Operation
Fig. 141: Open the shut off valve
The shut off valve prevents Diesel fuel discharge from the refueling pump.
NOTICE
The refueling pump is turned on when the shut off valve is closed!
When the shut off valve is closed, the refueling pump can run dry and therefore be
damaged.
u Do not operate the refueling pump with closed shut off valve.
u Before turning the refueling pump on, open the shut off valve.
u Open the shut off valve 4 on the connection of the refueling pump.
Fig. 142: Switch for refueling pump
u Remove the control section with cable from the retainer.

u Turn the refueling pump on with the switch 5 (green).
w When the maximum fill level is reached, then the fill level sensor turns the
refueling pump off automatically.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The refueling procedure can be interrupted at any time by turning off the switch 6
(red).
NOTICE
Danger of refueling pump damage if it runs dry!
u Make sure that the fuel level does not drop below the intake level of the intake
hose.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
94 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 143: Close the shut off valve
u Close the shut off valve 4.
Fig. 144: Control section retainer
u Place the control section into the retainer and secure it to prevent it from falling
out by moving the lever 6 down.
u Drain the fuel completely from the suction hose 2.
u Roll the suction hose 2 up and place it in the storage compartment. Close off
the connections with the blind couplings.
u Close the storage compartment.
3.3.2 Use of the machine in low or high ambient tempera-

tures
Note
Pay attention to the temperature application range for the lubricants filled in the
machine!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Fill the machine with lubricants and service fluids according to the temperature
at the jobsite.
Your machine can be utilized up to an ambient temperature of -22 °C to 45 °C

without special equipment and without restrictions.
From a constant ambient temperature below -22 °C or above 45 °C , special equip-
ment must be installed to ensure proper operation.
If the ambient temperature is below -22 °C or above 45 °C:
u Contact Liebherr Service or the manufacturer.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 95
Operation
3.3.3 Start the Diesel engine
Fig. 145: Operating instructions

1 Read and understand 2 Drive and work
Operate the machine only if you have read and understand the operating instruc-
tions!
Fig. 146: Personnel transport prohibited
DANGER
It is strictly prohibited for personnel to ride along on the machine!
u Never use the blade or the bucket as a working platform or to transport
personnel.
u Personally make sure that no one is endangered by moving the machine.
Note
The machine is equipped with a hydrostatic travel drive.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u The Diesel engine cannot be started by pushing or towing the machine.
Starting preparations
Make sure that the machine is first in operating position. (For more information see:
3.3.1 Operate the machine daily , page 88)
Check the position of the safety lever

The engine can only be started if the safety lever is raised.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
96 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
WARNING
A defective safety lever can lead to severe accidents!
If the Diesel engine can be started even though the safety lever is in the down
position:
u Turn the Diesel engine off immediately.
u Remedy the defect immediately.
Fig. 147: Safety lever up
u Move the safety lever 1 up.
Check the position of the travel joystick

The travel joystick must be in neutral position.
u Set the travel joystick to neutral position.
Adjust the throttle control
Fig. 148: Throttle control for idling

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Turn the throttle control to the stop to the left. Set the throttle control to idling.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 97
Operation
NOTICE
Danger of damage of the Diesel engine!
If the cold Diesel engine is subjected to a full load, the Diesel engine can be
damaged.
u Let the Diesel engine warm up.
u After the starting procedure, leave the throttle control at low idle and wait until
the Diesel engine is warm before subjecting it to a full load.
Carry out the starting procedure
Check the indictor lights

When the ignition key is in contact position, the indicator lights, the on-board elec-
tronic and the control electronic are checked.
Fig. 149: Starter switch contact position
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

The following indicator lights light up only for a short time (duration 2.5 - 3
seconds):
w Indicator light Duo cone (slipring) area, left 45
w Indicator light Duo cone (slipring) area, right 46

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
98 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation

The following indicator lights light up constantly:
w Warning light Operator's cab 31
w Indicator light Battery charge 40
w Indicator light Pump replenishing pressure 41
w Indicator light Electronic 43
w Indicator light Parking brake 48
Start the Diesel engine

The preheat time depends on the existing ambient temperature and the electric
starting conditions.
The Diesel engine is equipped with an automatic preheat system. If the starter
switch is set to contact position, the preheat time starts automatically and the indi-
cator light Preheat system lights up.
Note
u When the Diesel engine is warm and high ambient temperatures are present,
the indicator light Preheat system blinks: Start the Diesel engine without
preheating.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 152: Starter switch - starting position
u Turn the starter switch to contact position.

w In case of automatic preheating, the indicator light Preheat system lights up.
w When the Diesel engine is ready to start, the indicator light Preheat system
blinks.
u Turn the starter switch to starting position and hold it in this position until the
engine starts.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 99
Operation
u Do not try to start the engine for longer than maximum 10 seconds without a
break.
Troubleshooting
The Diesel engine does not start?
u Reset the starter switch to zero position.
u Repeat the starting procedure after waiting for 120 seconds.
If the engine does not start after two starting procedures:
u Find the cause with the troubleshooting chart and remedy it. (For more informa-
tion see: 4 Operating problems, page 159)
u Release the starter switch as soon as the engine is running. The starter switch
returns by itself to operating position.
u Do not put a full load on the engine until after a short warm up period.
Fig. 153: The indicator lights turn off

After the engine has started, the following indicator lights turn off:
w Warning light Operator's cab 31
w Indicator light Battery charge 40
w Indicator light Pump replenishing pressure 41
Troubleshooting
The indicator lights do not turn off?
u Turn the engine off immediately and remedy the problem. (For more information
see: 4 Operating problems, page 159)
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
100 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Starting preparations in freezing temperatures
Fig. 154: Winter operation
The following preparations improve the starting behavior at low temperatures.

Preparations:
– Check the battery charge, recharge the battery if necessary.
– Use winter fuel. See section “Lubricants and service items” under Winter opera-
tion.
WARNING
Danger of explosion due to frozen batteries!
Do not charge batteries if they are frozen.
u Let the batteries warm up to approx. 16 °C before recharging.
WARNING
When using ether based starting aids to start Diesel engines with preheat systems,
there is a danger of explosion!
u Do not use ether based starting aids.
u Carry out the listed preparations for starting at freezing temperatures.
NOTICE
The cold Diesel engine is subjected to a full load!
If the cold Diesel engine is subjected to a full load, the Diesel engine can be
damaged.
u Let the Diesel engine warm up.
u After the starting procedure, leave the throttle control at low idle and wait until
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
the Diesel engine is warm before subjecting it to a full load.
3.3.4 Travel operation

The preparations for travel operation must be carried out in the specified
sequence.
Make sure that the machine is in operating position.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 101
Operation
Self test of electronic system
Fig. 155: Safety lever down
u Move the safety lever 1 down.

w After approx. 3 seconds, the indicator light Electronic lights up for a short
time.
Note
The electronic system runs through a self-check.
u Deflect the travel joystick only after the indicator light Electronic lights up.
Bring engine to operating temperature

If the hydraulic oil is too cold, the machine reacts sluggishly.
u Repeatedly actuate the working hydraulic cylinder to stop.
w The hydraulic oil is thereby brought to operating temperature.
Set the engine rpm
NOTICE
If the Diesel engine is operated without a load, then it will not reach the required
operating temperature and the piston rings and cylinder bushings will not run in
optimally.
u Turn the Diesel engine off when the machine is not operated.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 156: Throttle control for full load

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
102 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
u Turn the throttle control to the stop to the right: Set the throttle control to full
load.
w The machine is now ready to drive.
Note
u Work with the machine always at full engine rpm.
u Work with reduced engine rpm only in certain cases.
Preselect the speed ranges

The machine is equipped with a rocker switch on the travel joystick to preselect the
travel speed.
By changing to position "I" , the maximum possible travel speed can be reduced.
The maximum travel speed, which can be obtained, is shown in the LC display.
When the travel joystick is in neutral position or in forward position, the maximum
obtainable speed for forward travel is shown in the LC display. When the travel
joystick is in reverse position, the maximum obtainable speed for reverse travel is
shown in the LC display.
The speed ranges can also be selected during travel.
At reset from full travel speed, the machine is hydrostatically slowed down.
Fig. 157: Lower speed range

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 158: Downhill travel

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 103
Operation
WARNING
Danger of accidents due to loss of control over the machine!
When driving carelessly downhill, the drive train can overspeed.
u Drive downhill at low travel speed and maximum 4 km/h .
u Move the switch on the travel joystick before driving on slopes to position “I” .
u Set the rpm to full load.
u Reduce the travel speed to keep the engine rpm under 2100 rpm .
Note
To optimally utilize the machine power:
u Carry out heavy pull work with the machine only in low speed range - rocker
switch position I, as well as maximum 2 km/h .
Fig. 159: Rocker switch - speed ranges
u Set the switch on the travel joystick to position “I,II” or “III” .
Speed ranges - basic setting
Full speed range

u Push the rocker switch on top - position “III”
w Forward speed 0 km/h to 10 km/h
w Reverse speed 0 km/h to 10 km/h
Medium speed range

u Rocker switch center position - position “II”
w Forward speed 0 km/h to 6.5 km/h
w Reverse speed 0 km/h to 8 km/h
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Lower speed range

u Push the rocker switch on the bottom - position “I”
w Forward speed 0 km/h to 4 km/h
w Reverse speed 0 km/h to 4.5 km/h

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
104 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 160: LC display km/h

w The obtainable speed is shown in the LC display 1 in km/h .
Travel speed fine adjustment

The travel speed can be decreased or increased within the selected speed ranges
(I, II, III) with the button 1 and the button 2 on the travel joystick in 0.5 km/h incre-
ments.
The speed can also be set separately for forward as well as for reverse. This func-
tions makes it possible for the operator to optimally match the machine speed to
the operating conditions.
Fig. 161: Button Travel speed
u Press the button 1 or button 2 on the travel joystick and set the desired speed.
w The speed is increased or decreased.
Adjustable speeds
The speed ranges for the travel speed cannot overlap through the fine adjustment.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
For example, if the forward travel speed is set in speed range “III” to 7 km/h, then
the speed in travel speed range “II” cannot be set higher than 7 km/h.
Full speed range - Rocker switch position “III”
– forward 6.5 km/h to 10 km/h

– reverse 6.5 km/h to 10 km/h
Medium speed range - Rocker switch position “II”
– forward 4 km/h to 10 km/h

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 105
Operation
– reverse 4 km/h to 10 km/h
Low speed range - Rocker switch position “I”
– forward 2 km/h to 6.5 km/h

– reverse 2 km/h to 6.5 km/h
The fine adjustment has a memory function (save function). The travel speed
range selected via the buttons on the travel joystick remain, even after turning the
machine off.
The travel speed can also be set separately for forward as well as for reverse
travel.
Fig. 162: Speed adjustment
u Set the switch on the travel joystick to position “I” or “II” .

w The speed range is selected.
u Deflect the travel joystick into the desired direction (forward or reverse).
Fig. 163: Button Travel speed

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Press the button 1 or button 2 on the travel joystick and set the desired speed.
w The travel speed is shown in the LC display and blinks, as long it was not
saved. As soon as the speed no longer blinks, it has been automatically
saved.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
106 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
3.3.5 Travel
Driving straight ahead
Driving forward
Fig. 164: Driving forward
u Push the travel joystick slowly forward.

w The machine drives forward.
w The further the travel joystick is pushed forward, the higher the travel speed.
Driving backward
Fig. 165: Driving backward
u Slowly pull the travel joystick to the rear.

w The machine drives backward.
w The further the travel joystick is pushed back, the higher the travel speed.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Steering
In addition to driving forward and backward, any desired steering movement with
variable speeds is possible.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 107
Operation
Turning to the left
Fig. 166: Turning to the left
u Deflect the travel joystick forward and push it to the left.

w The machine drives forward with a slight left hand curve, both chains turn
forward.
u Driving in a tighter curve: Push the travel joystick further to the left.
If the travel joystick is deflected by 80%, then the chain on the inside of the curve
stops, the outer chain turns in the preselected speed. From 80% deflection on, the
chain on the inside of the curve turns in the opposite direction as the chain on the
outside of the curve. The further the travel joystick is deflected, the faster the chain
on the inside of the curve will turn in the opposite direction. The machine counter-
rotates.
u Counterrotation: Deflect the travel joystick more than 80%.
Turning to the right
Fig. 167: Turning to the right

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Deflect the travel joystick forward and push it to the right.

w The machine drives forward with a slight right hand curve, both chains turn
forward.
u Driving in a tighter curve: Push the travel joystick further to the right.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
108 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
If the travel joystick is deflected by 80%, then the chain on the inside of the curve
stops, the outer chain turns in the preselected speed. From 80% deflection on, the
chain on the inside of the curve turns in the opposite direction as the chain on the
outside of the curve. The further the travel joystick is deflected, the faster the chain
on the inside of the curve will turn in the opposite direction. The machine counter-
rotates.
u Counterrotation: Deflect the travel joystick more than 80%.
3.3.6 Braking
Brake with the travel joystick

The hydrostatic travel drive of the machine also functions as an operating brake.
When moving the travel joystick back toward the direction of neutral position, the
travel speed decreases in the same ratio.
Fig. 168: Travel joystick in neutral position
u Set the travel joystick in neutral position.

w In neutral position of the travel joystick, the hydrostatic drive secures the
machine, preventing it from rolling off.
w In neutral position, the parking brake will be applied automatically after
approx. 5 seconds.
w The working attachment can still be moved.
Brake with the speed reduction pedal

With the speed reduction pedal, the travel speed which was set with the travel
joystick can be reduced up to standstill.
NOTICE
The speed reduction pedal is pressed down past the noticeable resistance, this
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
activates the parking brake.

Danger of damage of the parking brake.
u Press the speed reduction down all the way only in danger situations.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 109
Operation
Fig. 169: Speed reduction pedal
CAUTION
Danger of accident due to careless breaking of the machine!
Pressing the speed reduction pedal all the way down causes the machine to stop
abruptly.
u Press the speed reduction pedal 1.

w The travel speed set with the travel joystick is reduced.
u Adjust the foot latch 2: Release the mounting screws and match the position of
the foot latch to the respective requirements.
Activate the parking brake

The parking brake is activated as follows:
– by moving the safety lever up
– if the travel joystick is in neutral position for longer than 5 seconds
– if the travel joystick is in neutral position and the chains theoretically continue to
turn by approx. 2 cm.
When the Diesel engine is turned off, the safety lever 1 must always be in the
uppermost position.
If the Diesel engine is inadvertently turned off, bring the travel joystick to neutral
position and move the safety lever to the uppermost position. LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 170: Safety lever park position

w The parking brake is activated.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
110 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Release the parking brake

Make sure that the Diesel engine is running.
Fig. 171: Safety lever operating position

u Deflect the travel joystick.
w The parking brake is released.
3.3.7 Take the machine out of service

Before turning the Diesel engine off and leaving the machine, make the following
preparations.
Raise the working attachment
Fig. 172: Work equipment
u Lower the working attachment to the ground.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Park the machine at temperatures below freezing
NOTICE
The track of the machine is frozen to the ground!
If the machine is ripped loose forcefully, significant damage can occur.
u Carefully heat the track pads to release the machine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 111
Operation
Fig. 173: Parking at temperatures below freezing
u Park the machine on wooden boards if the temperatures are below freezing.
Activate the parking brake
u Move the safety lever up.

w The indicator light - Parking brake lights up.
Turn the Diesel engine off
NOTICE
Danger of damaging the Diesel engine, especially in case of turbocharged engines!
If the engine is turned off suddenly, the turbocharger continues to run for some time
without oil supply.
u Do not suddenly turn the Diesel engine off from full load rpm.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
112 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Fig. 175: Diesel engine low idle rpm
u Turn the throttle control to the stop to the left.

w The engine RPM is reduced to low idle.
u Continue to let the engine run in low idle for 10-15 seconds.
u Turn all actuated current users off (such as headlights, windshield wipers, ...).
Fig. 176: Starter switch - zero position
u Turn the starter switch to neutral position and pull the key off.
w All indicator lights turn off.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 113
Operation
Troubleshooting
The Diesel engine cannot be turned off with the starter switch?
Due to a problem in the Diesel engine control unit it can happen that the Diesel
engine cannot be turned off via the starter switch.
Fig. 177: Main fuse F1
u Pull the main fuse 1 (Safety automat F1) to turn the Diesel engine off.
u Then return the main fuse 1 to operating position.
Troubleshooting
The Diesel engine cannot be turned off with the starter switch?
If the Diesel engine still cannot be turned off with the starter switch?
u Contact Liebherr Service immediately.
Turn the battery master switch off

The battery master switch is on the right hand side in the battery compartment.
Before leaving the machine, turn the battery master switch off.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Set the battery master switch to position “0” .

w The battery master switch is turned off.
u Secure the machine to prevent unauthorized access: Pull the key on the main
switch.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
114 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Stop the travel drive and continue with the emergency

off button
Stop the travel drive

In dangerous or unclear situations, the travel drive can be stopped immediately by
pressing the emergency off button.
WARNING
Pressing the emergency off button while the machine is traveling causes the
machine to stop abruptly. If the seatbelt is not worn it can result in an accident with
the most severe injuries!
u Press the emergency off button.

w The travel drive will be stopped abruptly.
w The Diesel engine continues to run.
w The attachment can still be moved.
Continue operation
u Lift the emergency off button until it engages.
u Deflect the travel joystick into the desired direction.
Select the park position

The ignition key may not be pulled in park position.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 115
Operation
Fig. 180: Starter switch - park position
u Turn the starter switch to park position.

w The interior light is operational.
DANGER
Severe danger of accidents for maintenance personnel if a second person tampers
on the machine without authorization!
u Secure the machine to prevent unauthorized access by a second person!
When you leave the machine:

u Turn the starter switch to position “0” and pull the key off.
3.3.8 Working in water
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the fan blade as well as the Diesel engine and the cooler!
If the maximum fording depth is exceeded, the fan and as a result the cooler and
the Diesel engine will be destroyed.
u Do not exceed the maximum fording depth (lower edge of the carrier roller).
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 181: Lower edge of the carrier roller
The lube points are degreased by moving in water.

u After working in water, grease all lube points.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
116 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
3.3.9 Working with the attachment
Raising and lowering the dozer blade

By deflecting the blade control lever to the front or rear, the dozer blade is lowered
or raised.
Depending on the lever deflection, the dozer blade is brought to the desired
working height at different speeds.
If the blade control lever is released, it returns by itself to neutral position. The
dozer blade remains at the adjusted working height.
WARNING
Danger of accidents due to raised components and loads!
Falling components or loads can result in severe bodily injuries or even death.
u Never work under raised components and loads if they are not properly
supported or laying on the ground.
Standing under suspended loads is strictly prohibited!
Fig. 182: Lift the dozer blade
u Move the blade control lever backward in direction -a-.

w The dozer blade is raised.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 183: Lower the dozer blade
u Move the blade control lever in direction -b-.

w The dozer blade is lowered.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 117
Operation
Dozer blade - Emergency lowering

For safety reasons, the dozer blade can be lowered if the diesel engine or the
hydraulics fail by deflecting the blade control lever forward in direction -b-.
The safety lever must be in the lowest position in this case.
u Move the blade control lever in direction -b-.
Blade release
The blade release makes it possible to place the dozer blade with its own weight
on the ground and allows it to move freely according to the ground unevenness.
DANGER
Danger of accidents due to quickly dropping working attachment!
By activating the blade release, the raised working attachment drops quickly.
Persons within the danger zone are severely injured or crushed.
u It is prohibited to remain in the danger zone of the machine.
Fig. 184: Hazardous situation
Activating blade release
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the working attachment!
Do not activate the blade release function if the attachment is completely raised.
u Lower the dozer blade to approximately 30 cm off the ground before the blade
release is activated.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 185: Lowering the working attachment

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
118 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
u Lower the dozer blade to 30 cm off the ground.
Fig. 186: Activating blade release
u Move the blade control lever to the front past the pressure point all the way to
the stop and release.
w The blade control lever is held in this position by magnetic force.
w The blade falls freely to the ground and adapts to the ground conditions.
u To deactivate the blade release: move the blade control lever backward into
neutral position.
Actuating the tilt cylinder

The dozer blade can be tilted to the left or right with the tilt cylinder.
Depending on the lever deflection, the dozer blade is tilted to the selected side at
different speeds.
When the blade control lever is released, it returns by itself to neutral position. The
preselected incline of the dozer blade remains.
Tilting dozer blade to the left

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 187: Tilting dozer blade to the left
u Push the blade control lever to the left in direction -c-.

w The dozer blade is tilted to the left.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 119
Operation
Tilting dozer blade to the right
Fig. 188: Tilting dozer blade to the right
u Push the blade control lever to the right in direction -d-.

w The dozer blade is tilted to the right.
Mechanical cutting angle adjustment

The cutting angle of the dozer blade can be adapted to the current ground condi-
tions by changing the strut as well as the tilt cylinder position in 3 stages.
NOTICE
Tilt cylinder and strut not pinned in the same cutting angle position.
The full tilt path is not available.
u Always pin the tilt cylinder and strut on the left and right in the same position.
Cutting angle position
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 189: Adjustable positions
1 Position centre Normal ground

2 Position front Hard ground. For hard ground, set a steep cutting
angle.
3 Position rear Soft ground. For soft ground, set a flat cutting angle.
Tab. 11

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
120 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
Setting the cutting angle
Fig. 190: Lower the dozer blade
u Lower the dozer blade to the ground.

u Actuate the tilt cylinder momentarily to relieve the pin on the strut.
u Park the machine properly.
Fig. 191: Remove the pin
u On the strut remove the retaining screw and the ring and knock out the pin.
WARNING
Bores are aligned using fingers without tools.
Danger of crushing fingers and hands.
u Use suitable tools.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 192: Actuation of tilt cylinder

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 121
Operation
– The strut is pushed forward to extend the tilt cylinder.

– The strut is pushed backward to retract the tilt cylinder.
u Start the machine and move the tilt cylinder in the desired direction until the pin
can be installed.
Fig. 193: Align the strut
u Align the strut with a suitable tool and install the pin from the inside to the
outside.
Fig. 194: Install the pin
u Affix the pin with ring and retaining screw.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 195: Remove the pin
u On the tilt cylinder, remove the retaining screw and the ring and knock out the
pin.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
122 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operation
WARNING
Bores are aligned using fingers without tools.
Danger of crushing fingers and hands.
u Use suitable tools.
Fig. 196: Actuation of tilt cylinder
The cutting angle position must be pegged in the same position on both sides.
u Start the machine and move the tilt cylinder in the desired direction until the pin
can be installed.
Fig. 197: Install the pin
u Align the strut with a suitable tool and install the pin from the inside to the
outside.
u Affix the pin with ring and retaining screw.
3.3.10 Work with optional equipment

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Raise and lower the ripper

The ripper is actuated with the ripper lever, which is located on the right of the
operator's seat.
By deflecting the ripper lever to the front or rear, the ripper is lowered or raised.
Depending on the lever deflection, the ripper is brought to the desired working
height at different speeds.
If the ripper lever is released, it returns by itself to neutral position. The ripper
remains in the adjusted working height.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 123
Operation
Fig. 198: Ripper

1 Pull bar 3 Hydraulic cylinder
2 Ripper tooth
WARNING
Danger of accidents due to raised components and loads!
Falling components or loads can result in severe bodily injuries or even death.
u Never work under raised components and loads, if they are not properly
supported or laying on the ground.
Standing under suspended loads is strictly prohibited!
Fig. 199: Ripper lever
u Move the ripper lever forward in direction -e-.

w The ripper lever is lowered.
u Move the ripper lever backward in direction -f-.
w The ripper lever is raised.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Rear winch operation

For the installation of a protective grill contact Liebherr for further information.
CAUTION
Danger of injury when working with rear winches without protective grill!
When working with rear winches, the cable can break and be thrown into the oper-
ator's cab.
u For rear winch operation, secure the operator's platform with a protective grill.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
124 PR734-1481 / 13743
Work methods
3.4 Work methods
3.4.1 Grading
To strip material, different working methods can be selected, depending on the
ground build up.
Increasing blade volume

For increasing blade volume, material is added over the entire dozing distance.
This working method is used for dense ground.
Fig. 200: Increasing blade volume
u Slowly lower the blade while driving forward and take up material over the entire
dozing distance.
Dozing with full blade

Use this working method for loose ground.
With this method, the maximum push power is obtained with simultaneous reten-
tion of the grading track.
Note
The chains start to slip.
u Lift the blade slightly.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 125
Work methods
Fig. 201: Push with full blade
u Lower the blade while driving forward and fill the blade at the start of the
grading distance.
Dozing in tracks
Dozing in tracks is predominantly used for transport of large amounts of material
over longer distances.
Fig. 202: Dozing in tracks
u Establish a track: Push the first blade volume forward approx. 10 m to 20 m in

the intended track.
u Back the machine up, fill the blade again and push with the already pushed
material to the end of the required track.
w Using this working method, almost no material will fall aside from the blade
and the push volume per working cycle will be significantly increased.
3.4.2 Fine grading

Make sure that the required straight end bits are installed for making a fine grade.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
126 PR734-1481 / 13743
Work methods
Fig. 203: Working face fine grading
u Establish a working face with a minimum dimension of the track length at the
height of the desired level.
u Starting from this level, move the material in for the fine grade.
Note
Track imprints on the surface of the fine grade.
u Using the blade release, remove the track imprints by pulling them off back-
ward.
u Remove track imprints: Pull the working surface off backward with the blade
release turned on.
3.4.3 Using several machines simultaneously
Parallel operation
If two crawler tractors are used simultaneously to move larger amounts of loose
material, then use them in parallel operation.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 204: Parallel operation with two machines
u Operate both machines with the blades as close to each other as possible.
w This working method significantly increases the total output.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 127
Work methods
3.4.4 Making ditches
Making ditches
Fig. 205: Pulling a ditch
u Tilt the blade into the desired direction.

u Set the lowered end bit of the blade on the ground in the planned center of the
ditch and cut the direction of the ditch by driving forward.
u Continue the working procedure until the desired depth and the respective slope
angle is reached.
u Set the blade horizontally and clean up the edges of the ditch.
u Make deep ditches after cleaning, vertically to the ditch evacuation.
3.4.5 Land clearing
Removing brush to medium sized trees

u Lower the blade attachment approx. 5 cm to 10 cm below level and rip the
brush from the ground by driving forward.
u Lift the blade so that the soil can fall from the roots.
Removing high shrubs and medium sized trees LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 206: Pushing a tree over
u Move against the tree with the raised blade in 30 cm to 40 cm and push it over.
u Continue to lift the blade while moving forward.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
128 PR734-1481 / 13743
Work methods
Felling trees
Fig. 207: Cutting roots
u Clean surrounding terrain.

u Cut the roots of the tree opposite and parallel to the desired fall direction with
the blade.
DANGER
Danger of accident due to toppling tree.
u As soon as the tree starts to fall, move back immediately.
u Do not drive on the rootstock.
Fig. 208: Felling the tree
u Slowly move toward the tree in the direction you want the tree to fall, with the
blade raised.
u Move back as soon as the tree starts to fall.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Removing rootstocks
CAUTION
Rootstocks exceed the ground clearance of the machine.
u When driving on the terrain, pay attention to rootstocks and rock deposits which
exceed the ground clearance of the machine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 129
Work methods
Fig. 209: Removing the rootstock
u Move on the rootstock with the blade below level and rip it out of the ground by
driving forward and simultaneously lifting the blade.
Embedding removed material

Removed material can be ripped out of the ground during dozing due to protruding
parts, if the embedding depth is insufficient.
Fig. 210: Embedding removed material
u Bury the removed material as deep as possible below the desired ground level.
3.4.6 Ripping
Generally the ground should be ripped as deep as possible.
For natural soil layers, we recommend to proceed in layers. To obtain the desired
depth, rip the same track several times.
The distance of the tracks depends on the desired size the material is to be cut in
to.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
In ripping application, make sure that both tracks are laying on the ground with the
full track length, if possible. If necessary, prepare the site accordingly.
NOTICE
Use a multi-tooth ripper to rip difficult to rip material!
Risk of damaging the ripper!
u Rip difficult to rip material or material which breaks into large pieces only with
one ripper tooth.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
130 PR734-1481 / 13743
Work methods
NOTICE
The machine is moved backward or turned when the ripper teeth are in the ground.
Risk of damaging the ripper!
u Do not turn the machine or move backward when the ripper teeth are in the
ground.
u Lower the ripper while driving forward and rip the ground.
Fig. 211: Crosswise ripping
u If necessary, rip the ground crosswise.

u On slopes, always rip while driving downhill.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 131
Install and remove the attachment
3.5 Install and remove the attachment
3.5.1 Installation guidelines for installation and removal of

attachment parts
For the installation and removal of the attachments, always use a suitable lifting
device.
Clean all bearing points, pins, threads and similar and check them for damage.
q All control levers are in neutral position.
q Safety lever is in uppermost position.
q The Diesel engine is turned off.
WARNING
Danger of accident due to suspended or raised load!
Suspended or falling loads can result in severe bodily injuries or even death.
u Never step under a suspended load.
u Approach the boom only from the side.
u Before lifting attachment parts, determine their weight and have the necessary
lifting gear available. See section “Technical data”. (For more information see:
1 Product description, page 15)
3.5.2 Install the bearing shells of the attachment
Fig. 212: Anchor points of attachment
In the anchor points of the attachment, wear-resistant bearing shells are installed.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Always install the bearing shells are on the correct side.
NOTICE
The bearing shells are incorrectly installed!
The attachment cannot be installed correctly.
u At installation, always insert the bearing shells on the correct side.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
132 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 213: Bearing shell base
On the bearing shells there is a narrow 1 as well as a wide 2 base.

u Insert the bearing shell in such a way that it is flush.
Fig. 214: Bearing shell attachment
u Install the bearing shell on the correct side.

w Bearing shell 3 incorrectly installed.
w Bearing shell 4 correctly installed.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 215: Screws in half shells
u Insert the screws 1 at installation of the half shells from the bottom.
w The nuts 2 are on the piston rod.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 133
3.5.3 Install and remove the push frame with the straight
blade
Design overview
Fig. 216: Push frame - Straight blade

1 Connection Tilt cylinder 7 Strut
2 Connection Tilt cylinder 8 Straight blade
3 Tilt cylinder 9 Center retainer
4 Lift cylinder 10 Center bearing
5 Lift cylinder 11 Right push frame half
6 Left push frame half
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
134 PR734-1481 / 13743
Install the trunion
Fig. 217: Install the trunion
u Install the trunion on the left and right on the track roller frame.
Install the left half of the push frame
Fig. 218: Install the left half of the push frame
u Install the left half of the push frame with half shells on the left trunion.
Install the right half of the push frame

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 219: Install the right half of the push frame
u Install the right half of the push frame with half shells on the right trunion.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 135
Install the center bearing
Fig. 220: Set the center bearing
u Preassemble the center bearing and set it on the left half of the push frame.
Fig. 221: Connect the right half of the push frame
u Connect the right half of the push frame with screws and bars on the center
bearing.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 222: Support the push frame from below
u Lift the push frame with a lifting device on the front and support it on the left,
right and center to the height of the pivot points on the straight blade.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
136 PR734-1481 / 13743
Install the straight blade
Fig. 223: Insert half shells
u Insert the half shells with inserted screws on the blade side on the straight
blade.
Note
u Affix the half shells with a short piece of wood on the straight blade.
Fig. 224: Install the straight blade
u Install the straight blade on the push frame

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 225: Install the center retainer
u Install the center retainer on the push frame and on the straight blade.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 137
Install the hoist cylinder
Fig. 226: Remove transport safety devices
u Fold the transport retainer for the hoist cylinders down and tighten.
u Start the machine as described.
Fig. 227: Install the hoist cylinder
u Carefully extend the hoist cylinder and install with half shells on the straight
blade.
Install the tilt cylinder and strut LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 228: Breather screw of hydraulic tank
u Relieve the tank pretension: Back the breather screw 1 on the hydraulic tank
out by two turns.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
138 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 229: Hydraulic pressure
WARNING
The hydraulic system is under high pressure!
When releasing pressurized hydraulic lines and hoses, hydraulic oil can emerge
under high pressure and cause severe injuries.
u Do not remove any lines, hoses, connector pieces as long as the hydraulic
system is under pressure.
u With the Diesel engine turned off and the ignition turned on, actuate all func-
tions again to relieve the pressure in the hydraulic lines.
u Place a suitable container under the connections.
Fig. 230: Install the tilt lines
u Remove the cover and install the tilt lines.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Note
The tilt lines are mixed up at installation.
Tilting does not function as described in the Operating instructions.
u Install the tilt lines correctly.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 139
Fig. 231: Arrangement of tilt lines

1 Connection Tilt cylinder front 2 Connection tilt cylinder rear
Fig. 232: Insert the half shell on the straight blade
u Insert the half shell with inserted screws on the blade side on the straight blade.
Note
u Affix the half shells with a short piece of wood on the straight blade.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 233: Install the tilt cylinder
u Carefully extend the tilt cylinder and install on the straight blade.
u Install the strut on the straight blade.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
140 PR734-1481 / 13743
Align the machine to the attachment

u Start the machine as described.
Fig. 234: Measure the distance
u Align the machine to the push frame by counterrotating it carefully.

w The distance to the track roller frame, on the push frame must be the same
on the left and right.
u Measure the distance on the track roller frame on the left and right.
u Park the machine properly.
Fig. 235: Tighten the center bearing screws
u Tighten the screws 1 on the center bearing.
Note
u Remove the attachment in reverse order.
u For extended storage, protect the parts from corrosion.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 141
Transport
3.6 Transport
3.6.1 Transport the machine by truck or rail
Prepare for transport

u Observe the transport width, height and weights. If necessary, remove the boom
and counterweight before transport.
u Have suitable tension ropes or chains ready for rigging.
Fig. 236: Ramp incline
The ramp incline angle - W - may not be more than maximum 30°.
u Have a suitable ramp ready to drive onto the loading surface.
Fig. 237: Wet cleaning

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Before driving on the ramp, clean the chains to remove any ice and mud.
Drive onto the loading surface

For detailed descriptions (For more information see: 3.3 Operation, page 88)
Make sure that a guide is on hand to give the machine operator the necessary
signs.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
142 PR734-1481 / 13743
Transport
Fig. 238: Guide
u Make sure that guides are always positioned to the side of the machine!
Fig. 239: Starting procedure
u Start the Diesel engine. (For more information see: 3.3.3 Start the Diesel
engine, page 96) (For more information see: 3.3.5 Travel, page 107)
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
DANGER
Danger of accidents due to careless driving!
Careless driving increases the dangers of accidents for loading personnel, the
guide as well as for the operator of the machine.
u When loading the machine, always drive carefully!

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 143
Transport
Drive onto the ramp only in low speed range position “I” .
Fig. 241: Low speed range
u Select low speed range: Set the rocker switch to position “I” .
u Start the machine out carefully. (For more information see: 3.3 Operation,
page 88)
After driving on the loading surface

u Stop the machine.

u Turn the Diesel engine off.
u Close and lock all doors and hoods on the machine.
DANGER
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The machine is incorrectly rigged!

The load can move and cause severe injuries or property damage.
u Fasten the machine properly with chains or ropes on the transport vehicle.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
144 PR734-1481 / 13743
Transport
Fig. 243: Rigging points, front and rear
NOTICE
Ropes or chains are routed over sharp edges!
Ropes or chains will be damaged.
u Cover sharp edges or corners with an edge protector before rigging.
u Fasten every corner of the machine with chains or ropes on the transport
vehicle.
u Front: Use the outside or inside of the track pads for rigging.
u Side: Use the inside of the track pads for rigging.
u Rear: Use the outside of the track pads for rigging. If the trailer hitch is installed,
use it for rigging.
Fig. 244: Secure the machine to prevent it from slipping
u Secure the machine to prevent it from slipping: Place the wedges 2 in front and
behind the track on both sides.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
3.6.2 Load the machine with the crane

For loading, observe the accident prevention guidelines! (For more information
see: 2.4.13 Safety guidelines for loading the machine with a crane, page 48)
q All control levers are in neutral position.
q The safety lever is in uppermost position.
q The Diesel engine is turned off.
q All doors and hoods on the machine are closed and locked.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 145
Transport
Prepare for transport
WARNING
Danger of accident due to suspended or falling load!
Suspended or falling loads can result in severe bodily injuries or even death.
u Never step under a suspended load.
u Approach a raised load only from the side.
u If necessary, remove a part of the working attachment before loading the

machine with the crane.
u Pay attention to the weight and collision dimensions of the machine. For addi-
tional information, see section “Technical Data”.
u Pay attention to the load bearing capacity and the length of the suspension: For
additional information, see section “Technical Data”.
Machine without rear attachment

To load the machine with a crane, the following equipment is required:
q Crane eyehooks on the rear: Are available as auxiliary equipment. Liebherr Id.
No.: PR734 - 9183433
q Suspension device, bar 2
The machine is equipped on the front with standard eyehooks.
Fig. 245: Crane eyehooks on the rear
u Install crane eyehooks on the rear.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
146 PR734-1481 / 13743
Transport
Fig. 246: Lifting points

1 Lifting points 3 Sign Lifting point
2 Suspension device, bar
u Attach or hang the suspension device, bar 2 on the intended lifting points 1 on
the machine.
Note
u The lifting points are marked with the sign 3.
u Carefully lift and load the machine.
Machine with rear attachment

To load the machine with a crane, the following equipment is required:
q Suspension device, bar 2
The machine is equipped on the front with standard eyehooks.
On the rear attachments, eyehooks are installed as standard equipment to lift the
machine.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 247: Lifting points

1 Lifting points 3 Sign Lifting point
2 Suspension device, bar
u Attach or hang the suspension device, bar 2 on the intended lifting points 1 on
the machine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 147
Transport
Note
u The lifting points are marked with the sign 3.
u Carefully lift and load the machine.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
148 PR734-1481 / 13743
Emergency operations
3.7 Emergency operations
3.7.1 Function of emergency operation

The electronic system of the machine is monitored by the electronic box. If an error
occurs, the electronic box of the machine switches to emergency operation.
Depending on the error which occurred, the machine is switched into two different
types of the emergency operation.
The indicator light Electronic blinks:
– An error is shown in the LC display. The travel speed is normal.
The indicator light Electronic blinks:
– An error is shown in the LC display. The travel speed is reduced.
In both cases contact Liebherr Service immediately.
In case of a problem, the machine must be towed from the danger zone, if
necessary, or it might be able to be moved backward from the danger zone.
3.7.2 Tow the machine

The following towing instructions are only for exceptional situations to bring a disa-
bled machine to a location where it can be repaired or loaded.
Towing speed and towing distance:
– max. towing speed no more than 2 km/h (walking speed),
– only short distances are permitted to tow the machine from the danger zone
(max.200 m).
Always move the machine over long distances with a transport vehicle!
Towing the machine is problematic and is always carried out at the owner's risk.
Damage or accidents which occur during towing of the machine cannot be covered
by the manufacturer's warranty under any circumstances.
The required equipment to tow the machine is available from your Liebherr dealer.
Towing safety
WARNING
Danger of accidents due to improper towing!
Improper towing a disabled machine can result in severe injuries or death.
u
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
For towing, observe all specified safety guidelines and the following recommenda-
tions:
– Keep the angle of the towing cable in relation to the machine to a minimum. The
angle should never deviate by more than 30°from the machine length axle.
– Start out and move the machine slowly and evenly. If the machine is moved
unevenly, the towing cable or the rod can be overloaded and break off.
– When towing on slopes, the towing machine must be at least the same size as
the one being towed. Power, weight and brake force of the towing machine
must be adequate to keep both machines under control. (For more information
see: 2.4.9 Safety guidelines for towing the machine, page 45)
The following fastening point on the front of the machine is provided for towing.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 149
Fig. 248: Fastening point front
To tow the machine, use the front fastening point.

The fastening points is marked with the reference sign for the rigging point.
Tow the machine

u To tow the machine, short circuit the hydrostat and release the parking brake.
Note
u The machine can only be towed if the electrical system is fully functioning.
Fig. 249: Remove the cover plate for the main frame
u Remove the cover plate for the main frame.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 250: Remove the test fittings

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
150 PR734-1481 / 13743
u On the travel motors, remove the four test fittings.
Fig. 251: Hydraulic lines and angle fittings
u Install the angle fittings 2 on the hydraulic lines 1 .
Fig. 252: Short circuit the connections
u Short circuit connections “ML1 to ML2” and “MR1 to MR2” with the hydraulic
lines.
Note
u The angle fittings must be connected on connections “ML1” and “MR1” .
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 253: Brake adapter

1 Connecting piece 3 Cartridge holder
2 Brake adapter

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 151
u Remove the fitting 1 with union nut and the conical cap from the brake
adapter 2.
Fig. 254: Remove the hose
u Remove the hose from connection “B” and close off with the fitting 1 of the
brake adapter.
Fig. 255: Connect the brake adapter
u Remove the brake adapter 2 from the cartridge holder 3 and connect on
connection “B”.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 256: Install the cartridge holder
u Insert a new air pressure cartridge into the cartridge holder 3 and screw the
cartridge holder onto the brake adapter.
w Pressurized air flows into the brake circuit.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
152 PR734-1481 / 13743
Tow the machine

u Access the operator's platform.
Fig. 257: Emergency off button raised
u Check the position of the emergency off button 61: Raise the emergency off
button.
Note
u For the towing procedure, the emergency off button 61 must be in operating
position.
Fig. 258: Starter switch contact position

The following indicator lights must light up:
w Indicator light Travel gear brake
w Indicator light Pump replenishing pressure
w Charge indicator light
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
w Indicator light Electronic problem

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 153
Fig. 259: Press the towing button and the scroll key
u Press button Towing mode 70 and the scroll key 53 simultaneously within 10
seconds.
w The word “TOWING” is shown blinking in the LC display.
w The towing mode is activated.
Fig. 260: LC-display “TOWING”

4 Display Towing mode “TOWING”
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

w The indicator light Travel gear brake lights up.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
154 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 262: Forward travel
u Deflect the travel joystick forward.

w The parking brake is released.
w The indicator light Travel gear brake turns off. The machine has no brakes
now!
WARNING
Uncontrolled rolling off of the machine due to released brakes!
u Carry out the towing procedure by taking the specified safety guidelines into
account.
NOTICE
The oil motors are driven with insufficient lubrication!
Oil motor damage due to running dry. Observe the towing time and total distance.
u Do not tow the machine for longer than 10 minutes and faster than 2 km/h and
not for a longer total distance of more than 200 m.
u Tow the machine.
Stop the machine

In dangerous or unclear situations, the machine can be stopped immediately by
pressing the emergency off button.
To stop the machine:
u Turn the ignition off.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 155
Fig. 263: Press the emergency off button

w The parking brake is applied.
u To continue towing, raise the emergency off button and repeat the towing proce-
dure starting from pressing the scroll key and the button Towing mode.
Note
u If the indicator light Travel gear brake does not turn off, then the towing proce-
dure must be repeated from inserting the air pressure cartridge. The pressure in
the system is no longer sufficient to vent the brake.
After the towing procedure

w The parking brake is applied.
w The indicator light Travel gear brake lights up.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en


PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
156 PR734-1481 / 13743
u Relieve the hydraulic pressure.
CAUTION
The hydraulic system is under pressure!
When opening the hydraulic fittings or hoses, there is a danger of injury due to the
hydraulic oil, which is under high pressure.
u Before removing the brake adapter, relieve the hydraulic pressure in the
system: Move the travel joystick several times in forward and backward direc-
tion.
u Carefully remove the brake adapter.
u Before putting the machine back into service, check if the parts installed for the
towing procedure have been removed and if the machine is in series condition
again.
3.7.3 Jump start procedure

If the machine is hard to start due to old batteries, the machine can be started with
an auxiliary battery.
Make sure that you have taken the following safety preparations.
Connect the auxiliary battery
WARNING
Danger of accidents due to incorrect or careless procedure when starting with
auxiliary batteries!
When connecting auxiliary batteries, increased gas formation can occur on old
batteries. This can result in an explosion.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Avoid open flames and any spark formation in the battery area.
u Wear safety glasses and protective gloves during the auxiliary jump start proce-
dure.
u Use only auxiliary start cables with sufficient diameter.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 157
Fig. 266: Start the machine with auxiliary battery

1 Ground point of discharged 2 Positive terminal of discharged
batteries batteries
u First connect the auxiliary start cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery 2 and then on the positive terminal of the auxiliary battery.
u Connect the second auxiliary start cable first on the ground point of the
discharged battery 1 and then on the negative terminal of the auxiliary battery.
Disconnect the auxiliary battery

u Before removing the auxiliary start cable, bring the Diesel engine of the
machine started with the auxiliary battery to idling speed.
u Before removing the auxiliary start cable, turn on large electrical users (such as
floodlights) on the machine which was started with the auxiliary battery.
u First remove the auxiliary cable from the negative terminal of the auxiliary
battery and then from the ground point of the discharged battery 1.
u Then remove the second auxiliary start cable first from the positive terminal of
the auxiliary battery and then from the positive terminal of the discharged
battery 2.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
158 PR734-1481 / 13743
4 Operating problems
Warning and malfunction messages

– Various malfunctions are shown optically via the respective indicator lights or
via the display instruments on the instrument panel.
– Warning functions are also acoustically supported.
Identification and remedy of malfunctions and errors
– Malfunctions can very often be traced back to incorrect operation or mainte-
nance of the machine.
For that reason, read the relevant chapter in the operating instructions
again carefully for each malfunction.
– Analyze the cause of the malfunction and rectify it immediately!
– Describe the malfunction and all accompanying circumstances as precisely as
possible when you contact Liebherr Service.
Precise information makes it possible to find and rectify the cause of the
malfunction quickly. Additionally, precise information on the type and serial
number of the machine is also required.
– Do not carry out any work which you have not been trained or instructed to do.
Fig. 267: Liebherr Service
Note
Taking care of problems with the “Service code charts”?
u Contact Liebherr Service.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 159
Operating problems Operator's manual
Problems - Cause - Remedy
4.1 Problems - Cause - Remedy
4.1.1 Diesel engine
Malfunction / error Cause Remedy

Starter does not turn over Main fuse burnt out Replace fuse
Battery connections loose or Clean loose connections and tighten
corroded
Battery voltage too low Charge or replace battery
Starter current circuit interrupted or Go to Liebherr Service
contacts corroded
Starter defective Go to Liebherr Service
Starter turns slowly Battery voltage too low Charge battery or replace
Battery connections loose or Clean loose connections and tighten
corroded
Ambient temperature too low Observe measures for winter opera-
tion
Diesel engine does not start or stops Fuel tank empty Refuel, bleed fuel system
again right away
Fuel filter plugged up Replace fuel filter
Fuel line, precleaner or strainer in Clean and bleed fuel system
fuel tank plugged up
Fuel system or filter leak Seal and bleed
Air in fuel system Bleed fuel system
Fuel not cold resistant Clean prefilter, replace fuel filter; use
cold season fuel
Ambient temperature too low Observe measures for winter opera-
tion
Heat flange defective (only in cold Check heat flange, replace if
temperatures) necessary
Diesel engine is hard to start Leak or insufficient pressure in fuel Leak check (visual inspection); have
low pressure circuit checked by Liebherr Service
Diesel engine compression too low Visit Liebherr Service
Heat flange defective (in cold Check heat flange, replace if
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Problem in electronic Read out error stack of engine

control unit, visit Liebherr Service
Diesel engine turns off inadvertently Current supply interrupted Visit Liebherr Service
Leak or insufficient pressure in fuel Leak check (visual inspection); have
low pressure circuit checked by Liebherr Service

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
160 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Operating problems

Insufficient Diesel engine output Defect on fuel system (plugged, Visual inspection for leaks, change
(insufficient power) leak) filter, visit Liebherr Service
Charge pressure too low Loose clamps, defective seals and
hoses, air filter dirty, turbocharger
has no power
Charge air temperature too high Charge air cooler dirty, insufficient
(Automatic power reduction by fan output, ambient temperature too
engine control unit) high, visit Liebherr Service
Coolant temperature too high (Auto- Check cooler for contamination,
matic power reduction by engine check fan and thermostat, visit Lieb-
control unit) herr Service
Fuel temperature too high (Auto- Visit Liebherr Service
matic power reduction by engine
control unit)
Operating area more than 1800 m No remedy, Diesel engine output
above sea level was reduced automatically
Injector nozzles get stuck or do not Visit Liebherr Service
disperse
Diesel engine compression too low Visit Liebherr Service
Diesel engine gets too hot Insufficient coolant Add coolant
(according to coolant temperature
Cooler dirty or calcified inside, cooler Clean or decalcify
display)
very dirty outside
Thermostat defective Check, replace if necessary, visit
Liebherr Service
Coolant temperature sensor defec- Check, replace if necessary, visit
tive Liebherr Service
Fan has insufficient RPM (only Check fan drive, replace if
hydrostatic fan drive necessary, visit Liebherr Service
Indicator light charge current lights V-belt tension insufficient Check V-belt tension, replace
up while Diesel engine is running tension pulley, if necessary
V-belt broken Replace V-belt
Cable connections loose or sepa- Attach or replace cable
rated
Alternator, rectifier or regulator Visit Liebherr Service
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
defective
Diesel engine emits black smoke Injector nozzles get stuck or do not Visit Liebherr Service
disperse
Turbocharger defective (insufficient Visit Liebherr Service
charge pressure)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 161

Exhaust gases are blue Oil level in Diesel engine too high. Correct the oil level; visit Liebherr
Lube oil gets into the combustion Service
chamber and is burnt.
Compressor side seal on exhaust Visit Liebherr Service
turbocharger defective
Crankcase vent defective Check, replace if necessary
Exhaust gases are white Start of injection too late Visit Liebherr Service
Heat flange defective (in cold Check heat flange, replace if
Diesel engine rattles Combustion problems Visit Liebherr Service
Diesel engine knocks Valve clearance too large Adjust valve clearance
Injector nozzles damaged or carbon- Visit Liebherr Service
ized
Bearing damage Visit Liebherr Service
Piston rings worn or broken, piston Visit Liebherr Service
corroded
Abnormal noise Leak on intake and exhaust lines Remedy leak, replace seal, if
causes whistling noise necessary
Turbine or compressor gear scrapes Visit Liebherr Service
on housing; foreign particle in
compressor or turbine; seized bear-
ings of rotating parts
Lube oil pressure too low Oil level in oil pan too low Add oil to the specified mark
Lube oil too thin (oil thinned by Drain oil, refill with specified oil
Diesel fuel)
Oil pressure gauge or pressure Check oil pressure and replace
sensor is defective damaged oil pressure sensor or
pressure gauge; visit Liebherr
Service
End regulating valve is not working Visit Liebherr Service
properly or dirt in end regulating
valve
Bearing plays too large due to wear Visit Liebherr Service
or bearing damage
Lube oil in cooling system Oil cooler or oil cooler plate leak Visit Liebherr Service
Coolant in lube oil Seal rings on cylinder liners leak Visit Liebherr Service
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Oil cooler or oil cooler plate leak Visit Liebherr Service

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
162 PR734-1481 / 13743
4.1.2 Hydraulic system

Indicator light replenishing pressure Excessive leakage Visit Liebherr Service
does not turn off after starting the
Diesel engine. Turn the Diesel
engine off immediately.
Abnormal noises of hydraulic Shut off valve on hydraulic tank is Open shut off valve
pumps. Turn the Diesel engine off closed
immediately.
Hydraulic pumps draw air Check oil level in hydraulic oil tank,
check suction lines for leaks
No reaction to travel joystick deflec- Safety lever in up position or emer- Move safety lever down and press
tion gency off button is pressed emergency off button
No reaction when actuating the Blade release turned on Turn blade release off
blade up function
4.1.3 Travel gear, tracks

Oil discharge on track rollers, carrier Seal damaged Replace seal
rollers or idler
Insufficient chain guide on idler Idler guide on track roller frame has Adjust play on idler guide
too much play
Chain jumps off or over Chain tension too low or sprocket Adjust or replace chain tension
worn
Correctly tensioned chain looses Chain tension cylinder defective Check chain tension cylinder,
tension quickly during application change if necessary or seal (only
authorized expert personnel)
Track or carrier roller is stuck Track extremely dirty clean
4.1.4 Electrical system

Charge indicator light does not turn V-belt for alternator loose or broken Tension or change V-belt
off
Alternator damaged Change alternator
Batteries are not or only insufficiently Batteries damaged Change batteries
charged
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Battery connections dirty or oxidized Clean battery connections

Cable is loose or damaged Connect or replace cable
No or erroneous function of an indi- Bulb burnt out, display instrument Change damaged part
cator light or a display instrument defective
Failure of some or all instrument Plug connector disconnected or Properly connect or change plug
panel functions damaged, ground line interrupted, connector, remedy short circuit,
short circuit fuse defective replace fuse

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 163
4.1.5 Heating system

Heater does not supply warm air Shut off valves of coolant line on Open shut off valves
engine are closed
Engine has no operating tempera- Bring engine to operating tempera-
ture ture
Blower for heater does not run No power supply Check fuse and wiring and fix
Blower motor defective Change blower motor
Only insufficient air flow in the opera- Fresh air filter dirty Clean air intake openings, replace
tor's cab fresh air filter
4.1.6 Working equipment

Cylinder gives way under load Piston seal in cylinder is damaged Recondition cylinder
Chain scrapes on push frame Blade adjustment incorrect Adjust correctly
(crawler dozer)
Excessive bearing play on attach- Bearing points worn Replace bearing parts
ment
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
164 PR734-1481 / 13743
Problem remedy
4.2 Problem remedy
4.2.1 Change the fuses

To avoid damage to the electrical system, use only fuses with the corresponding
amperage.
Before replacing a fuse, check the affected circuit.
Fig. 268: Fuses in battery compartment
The main fuse 1 and the fuse for the intake air preheating 2 are located on the right
hand side of the machine in the battery compartment.
Fuse Value Unit Description / function

F1 45 A Main fuse
F2 60 A Fuse Air intake preheating
Tab. 12
Note
u If the safety fuse is triggered, it is important to find the cause of the overload
and remedy the problem before turning the safety fuse back on.
u Establish the power supply for the machine: Press the button on the automatic
safety fuse.
Fuses in central electric housing

The additional fuses are located in the central electric housing on the left rear in
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
the compartment.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 165
Problem remedy
Fig. 269: Central electric housing
Access to the fuses is provided by removing the screws and the cover.
u Remove the screws 1 and remove the cover 2.
Fig. 270: Fuses in central electric housing
u Depending on the electrical problem, check the following chart – Fuse listing for
the fuse.
u Pull the affected fuse and replace it with a new fuse (Amperage depending on
placement).
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 271: Test base
A possibly defective fuse can be checked on the fuse test base.

u Set the fuse on the test base.
w If the fuse is working, the bulb 1 on the test base lights up.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
166 PR734-1481 / 13743
Problem remedy
Troubleshooting
The bulb does not light up?
The fuse is defective.
u Change the fuse.
Fuse chart in central electric housing

F3 not assigned
F4 not assigned
F5 not assigned
F6 not assigned
F7 5 A Power supply Display console
F8 7,5 A Safety lever
F9 10 A Electrical socket
F10 3 A Display instruments, warning light
F11 3 A Horn button
F13 not assigned
F14 not assigned
F15.a 3 A Solenoid valve blade release
F15.b not assigned
F16 not assigned
F17 not assigned
F18 not assigned
F19 25 A Air conditioning system 4)
F20.a not assigned
F20.b not assigned
F20.PR 10 A Heater
F21 5 A Operator's seat air cushioned 4)
F21.a not assigned
F21.b not assigned
F23 not assigned
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
F24 not assigned

F25 not assigned
F27 20 A Refueling pump 4)
F28.a 3 A Back up warning device 4)
F28.b not assigned
4) Optional equipment

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 167
Problem remedy

F29 not assigned
F30 not assigned
F31 not assigned
F32 not assigned
F33 not assigned
F34 not assigned
F35 30 A Cab
F38 not assigned
F39 not assigned
F45 3 A Cab interior lighting
F46 10 A Terminal X18 (24 V)
F47 10 A Terminal X18 (30)
F48 10 A Terminal X18 (15)
F49 5 A Transformer
F52 not assigned
F53 3 A Control motors Heater / air conditioner
F55 not assigned
F56 not assigned
F60 not assigned
F61 1 A Safety lever
F64 10 A Transformer 12 V
F65 3 A Power supply ECU/TCU
F66 3 A Power supply ECU, E-Box
F67 15 A Power supply ECU
F68 15 A Power supply ECU
F73 not assigned
F75 not assigned
F76 not assigned
F79 7,5 A Refueling pump 4)
F80 not assigned
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
F81 not assigned

F90 not assigned
F92 3 A Diagnostic plug
Tab. 13

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
168 PR734-1481 / 13743
Problem remedy
Fuse chart in the roof console

The fuses in the roof console can be changed after removing the cover.
Fig. 272: Fuses in the roof console

F22 15 A Headlight cab front
F22 XN 7,5 A Floodlight cab Xenon 4)
F40 7,5 A Wiper door
F41 7,5 A Wiper, front and rear
F42 7,5 A Light cab rear
F50 5 A Rotating beacon 4)
F54 3 A Potentiometer Control motors Heater / air condi-
tioner
F143 15 A Floodlight hoist cylinder
Tab. 14
Fuse in radio
The radio is secured with a separate fuse.

F71 5 A Radio
Tab. 15
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 169
Problem remedy
Fig. 273: Fuse in radio
If the radio is not functioning:

u Remove the radio and check or change the fuse 1.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
170 PR734-1481 / 13743
5 Maintenance
5.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule
Abbreviations used in this section: Bh or h = operating hours

Various marks (circle, box, star - filled and circle, box, start - empty) divide the
maintenance work into two groups.
The marks mean:
Chart with circle, box, star - filled
In this case, the machine operator or maintenance personnel are solely respon-
sible to carry out the maintenance work.
Affects maintenance intervals: Every 10 and 50 operating hours (h) and special
intervals.
The marks mean:
Chart with circle, box, star - empty
In this case, authorized Liebherr personnel or their contracted dealers must carry
out or supervise the maintenance and inspection work.
Affects maintenance intervals: At delivery, then every 500, 1000 and 2000 oper-
ating hours (h) and special intervals.
A list of spare parts, which is required for the maintenance and inspection work is
included in the “SERVICE PACKAGE” of the spare parts list.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 171
Maintenance Operator's manual
Maintenance and inspection schedule
Customer:....................Machine type:........................................... Serial no.:...................Operating hours:.....................Date:.................................
Maintenance / inspection after Tasks to be performed

service hours
By maintenance staff By authorised specialist

n Once-only activity staff
l Repeat interval o Once-only activity
ª If necessary m Repeat interval
Additional labelling T Annually before the winter ² If necessary
Other intervals
Confirm tasks
Additional labelling
On handover
Assistance required
All 1000 h
All 2000 h
See page
All 8-10 h
All 500 h
All 50 h
Have this task carried out exclusively by a

certified electrician
Overall machine
o m m m Check machine for external damage, correct maintenance and
proper condition
o m m m l250h Lubricate all lubricating points according to the lubrication chart 212
(shorten interval, if necessary)
o l l m m m Determine and carry out maintenance and inspection requirements
for the optional equipment in the scope of delivery according to the
manufacturer's operating instructions or manufacturer's data
o Explain the machine documentation to the operating personnel,
especially the Operating instructions and safety guidelines
Diesel engine
o l l m m m Check the engine oil level 214
m m m Change the engine oil (but at least 1 x a year), for oil quality and 215
aggravating factors, see section “Lubricants and service items”
m m m Change the lube oil filter (but at least 1 x a year) 217
l l m m m Check the Diesel engine arrangement and the belly pans for 217
contamination and clean
m m m Check the V-belt 218
o m m m Check the Diesel engine arrangement for leaks and condition 219
o m m Check the supply and exhaust lines for mounting and leaks 220
m m m Change the oil separator filter insert 221
m m m Electrical system Check the control unit mounting for condition 222
o m m Check all sensors and cable connections for tight seating and 222
condition
m3000h Check the vibration damper for distortion 223
T Check the heat flange
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
m10000h Change the heat flange

o m m Check the engine mount, oil pan and engine brackets for tight 223
seating
m m Check the engine rpm
m m Check and adjust the valve clearance (with cold Diesel engine)
m m Grease the gear ring on the flywheel
m m Take an oil sample before the oil change and send it in for analysis
(if an extended warranty or a service contract exists)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
172 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Maintenance

service hours

T Annually before the winter ² If necessary
Other intervals
Confirm tasks
On handover
Assistance required
All 1000 h
All 2000 h
See page
All 8-10 h
All 500 h
All 50 h

Cooling system
l l m m m Check the coolant level 224
o m m m Check the cooling system for leaks and condition 226
m m m Check the antifreeze concentration in the coolant 226
m6000h Change the coolant (but at least once every 4 years) 231
Fuel system
l l m m m Drain the fuel filter condensation (immediately if the indicator light 234
lights up)
m m Change the fuel filter cartridges (observe the bleeding instruction) 235
l m m m Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank (but at least 1 x a week) 238
l l m m m Drain the fuel separator condensation 246
m m m Check the fuel system for leaks and condition
Air filter system
ª Replace the air filter inserts (at least once a year) 248
Hydraulic system
o l l m m m Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank 251
n m m Clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank (and after repairs) up 253
to 50 hrs. daily.
o m m Change the return filter insert (or when the indicator light lights up 255
with the hydraulic oil at operating temperature)
m m m Change the replenishing circuit filter 257
o o m m Check the hydraulic system for function and leaks, check the hose 258
routing for chafing
m m m Check the oil cooler for contamination and clean 258
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
m3000h Hydraulic tank - Change the hydraulic oil (Liebherr). Pay attention 259
to the notes for oil analysis and dust intensive application! (For
more information see: 5.3.5 Hydraulic oil, page 186)
m Hydraulic tank - Change the hydraulic oil (from other manufac- 259
turers). Pay attention to the notes for oil analysis and dust inten-
sive application! (For more information see: 5.3.5 Hydraulic oil,
page 186)
m m m Drain water and sediments in the hydraulic tank (but at least every 261
6 months), when using an “environmentally friendly hydraulic
medium ” - weekly

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 173

service hours

Additional labelling T Annually before the winter ² If necessary
Other intervals
Confirm tasks
On handover
Assistance required
All 1000 h
All 2000 h
See page
All 8-10 h
All 500 h
All 50 h

o m m Check and adjust all hydraulic pressures according to adjustment
check list
o m m Check mountings and fittings for tight seating
m m Take an oil sample before changing the oil and send it in for anal-
ysis (if an extended warranty or service contract exists)
Splitterbox
o l l m m m Check the oil level 262
m m m Change the gear oil (but at least once every 2 years) 262
Electrical system
o l l m m m Check the function of the system, including displays, indicator 265
lights and lighting
o m m Clean, check and grease the battery connections
o m m Check the cable routing and connections
o m m Check and adjust the control system of the travel drive according
to the adjustment check list
m m T Check the charge condition of the batteries
Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system
o m m m Check the heater for function and leaks 269
m m m Clean the heater - fresh air filter and change, if necessary (in dust 270
intensive applications, shorten interval)
m m m l250h Turn the air conditioning system on regularly (but at least 1 time in 270
14 days)
m m m l250h Check the drain valves and clean them if necessary 273
ª Check the condenser for contamination and clean
m m m Check the mounting and drive belt for the air conditioner
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
compressor
m m m Check condition, moisture and fill of dryer unit (replace the dryer, if
necessary, evacuate the system and refill)
m m m Clean the water drain valves
m Check the electrical lines for chafing and plug connections for tight
seating
Have the air conditioning system checked by an HVAC technician
(1 x a year)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
174 PR734-1481 / 13743

service hours

T Annually before the winter ² If necessary
Other intervals
Confirm tasks
On handover
Assistance required
All 1000 h
All 2000 h
See page
All 8-10 h
All 500 h
All 50 h

Drive gear
l l m m m Check condition of travel gear 277
o m m m Check the oil level and clean the magnetic plug 277
o m m Change the oil and clean the magnetic plug (but at least once 278
every 4 years)
o m m m l250h Check the oil level in the duo cone (slipring) area (but at least 1 x a 279
year), or immediately after an indicator light lights up
o m m Check fittings for tight seating
o m m Flush the duo cone (slipring) area and replace the lubricant in the
duo cone (slipring) area (but at least every 4 years)
m m Take an oil sample from the gear before changing the oil and send
it in for analysis (if an extended warranty or a service contract
exists)
Track components
m m m n250h Checking the nuts and bolts of the travel gear components are 288
firmly seated
m m m Check the seals on the carrier rollers, track rollers and idlers
m m m Check and adjust the idler guides 289
ª Check and adjust the chain tension 293
² Check track wear
o m m Check the oil quantity in the axle bearing 302
m m m l250h Lubricate the equalizer bar bearing (shorten interval if necessary) 303
Working attachment
o l l m m m Check the cutting edges, end bits and ripper tips for wear (Make 304
sure that equipment suits application.)
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
o n m m m Check the blade center position and mounting (and at every instal- 304
lation)
m m m Check the equipment for accidental damage
m m m Check the bearing points of the working attachment for play and
wear
n m m m Check the mounting screws and bolt retainers of the attachment 304
for tight seating

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 175
Fill quantities, lubrication schedule
5.2 Fill quantities, lubrication schedule
5.2.1 Recommended lubricants
Description Recommended lubricant Symbol Qty.

Diesel engine (with filter Liebherr Motor oil 10W-40 30 l
change)
Liebherr Motor oil 10W-40 low ash
Liebherr Motor oil 5W-30
Diesel engine (without filter 29 l
change)
Hydraulic system Liebherr Hydraulic Basic 68
Liebherr Hydraulic Basic 100

Liebherr Hydraulic HVI
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic
System content 235 l
System content (with ripper) 245 l
Tank contents 144 l
Splitterbox Liebherr Hypoid 85W-140 EP 3.1 l
Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75W-90

Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS
PR 734–4 L / XL:
Travel gear (left and right, Liebherr Hypoid 85W-140 EP 19.5 l
each)
PR 734–4 LGP:
Travel gear (left and right, Liebherr Hypoid 85W-140 EP 25.5 l
each)
Travel gear duo cone (slipring) see Hydraulic system 4l
seal
Bearing points and chain Liebherr Universal grease 9900 4500 g
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
tensioner
Liebherr Universal grease Arctic
Tab. 16

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
176 PR734-1481 / 13743
5.2.2 Recommended service items
Description Recommended service item Symbol Qty.

Fuel tank Commercially available Diesel fuel with sulfur 400 l
content of less or the same as 0.5 %
Cooling system Liebherr Antifreeze OS Concentrate 37 l
Liebherr Antifreeze OS Mix

Cooling system (with heater 39 l
fill)
Window washer system Commercially available window washer fluid or 9.5 l
denatured alcohol
Air conditioning system refrig- R134a 1600 g

erant
Tab. 17
5.2.3 Lubrication schedule

The lubrication schedule is an overview of the location of maintenance points on
the machine and their inspection intervals.
For detailed information:
– about the completion of maintenance tasks, see section “Maintenance and
inspection schedule” and “Maintenance tasks.”
– about the required lubricants and service fluids, see section “Lubricants and
service fluids.”
– about the required fill quantities.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 177
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 276: Lubrication schedule illustration

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
178 PR734-1481 / 13743
5.2.4 Lubrication chart symbols
Symbol Meaning
Diesel engine
Hydraulic
Splitterbox
Travel gear
Travel gear Duo cone (slipring) seal
Axle bearing
Equalizer bar bearing
Lubrication point
Intervals in operating hours
Check the oil level
Grease
For oil change intervals, pay attention to the notes in the oper-
ating instructions.
Tab. 18: Legend to symbols in the lubrication schedule

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 179
Lubricants and fuels
5.3 Lubricants and fuels
5.3.1 General data

Observe the specifications for the lubrication and service fluids. Lubricate the
machine and change the oils within the specified time frames. For additional infor-
mation, see: “Lubrication schedule” and “Maintenance and inspection schedule”.
Keep the work area clean for these tasks. This increases the reliability and service
life of the machine.
u Carry out all work on the machine on level and solid ground.
u Turn the Diesel engine off, pull the ignition key and turn the battery master
switch to position 0 (off).
u Clean the grease fitting before lubrication.
u Clean all fill points including the surrounding area before opening.
u Carry out the oil change when the oil is at operating temperature, if possible.
u Check after every oil change or adding to the fill quantity (level) of the corre-
sponding aggregate (the specified fill quantities are reference values).
u Catch the used lubricant and service fluids in a suitable container and dispose
of them in an environmentally friendly manner according to the valid guidelines.
5.3.2 Diesel fuels
Specification
Diesel fuels must meet the minimum requirements of the following specifications.
Approved specifications:
– DIN EN 590
– ASTM D 975-89a - 1D and 2D
High sulfur content in Diesel fuel

1. See Oil change intervals depending on aggravating factors.
2. Diesel fuels with a sulfur content of more than 1% (10000 mg/kg) are not
permissible.
3. For Diesel engines with external exhaust recirculation (EGR): Use Diesel fuels
with a sulfur content of less than 0.005% (50 mg/kg).
4. For Diesel engine operation with engine oil specification E6 and standard oil
change interval (500h), Diesel fuel with a sulfur content of more than 0.005%
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
(50 mg/kg) is not permissible.

The Diesel fuel lubricity according to HFRR (60) Test must be maximum 460 µm
(lubricity corrected "wear scar diameter" [1,4] at 60 °C).
The fuel standard ASTM D 975 does not stipulate a fuel lubricity test for the fuel. A
written confirmation of the fuel supplier must be available. Suppliers should
supply the additives in their capacity as the body responsible for fuel quality.
It is not recommended that clients add secondary lubricity additives.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
180 PR734-1481 / 13743
Note
u Get a written confirmation from the supplier.
A Cetane number of at least 45 is required for fuels according to ASTM D 975. A

Cetane number above 50 is desirable, especially for temperatures less than 0 °C.
Diesel fuels at low temperatures (winter operation)

Diesel fuel excretes paraffin crystals at dropping ambient temperatures, which
increase the flow resistance in the fuel filter to a point where sufficient fuel supply
for the Diesel engine is no longer ensured.
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the injection system due to incorrect fuel!
Adding petroleum or normal gasoline causes damage to the injection system.
u Do not add petroleum, normal gasoline or other additives to the Diesel fuel.
If the ambient temperature drops below -20 °C:
u Use a starter aid (such as a fuel filter heater).
If the machine is utilized in arctic climates:
u Use special Diesel fuels, which provide sufficient flow behavior.
5.3.3 Lubricating oils for Diesel engines
Lube oil quality

Presently only high-alloy lube oils are used for modern Diesel engines.
They consist of base oils mixed with additives.

The lube oil specification for Liebherr Diesel engines is based on the following
specifications and guidelines.
Description Specification
ACEA - classification (Association des E4, E6, E7
Constructeurs Europeens de l'Automobile)
Caution: Use of particle filter permis-
sible only with E6
API classification (American Petroleum CH-4, CI-4
Institute)
Caution: note the reduced oil change
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
intervals
Tab. 19: Lube oil specifications
Lube oil viscosity

The selection of lube oil viscosity is made according to the SAE-classification
(Society of Automotive Engineers).
The ambient temperature is decisive in the correct selection of the SAE-classifica-
tion.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 181
The selection of the SAE classification provides no information about the quality of
a lube oil.
Excessive viscosity can cause starting problems, insufficient viscosity can
endanger the lubricating efficiency.
The temperature ranges given in the chart are reference values, which can be
exceeded or fallen below for short periods.
Fig. 279: Temperature dependent selection of SAE classification
The following Diesel engine oils are recommended for an ambient temperature of
-20 °C to 45 °C:
Liebherr Motor oil 10W-40, Specification ACEA E4
Liebherr Motor oil 10W-40 low ash Specification ACEA E6
The following Diesel engine oils are recommended for an ambient temperature of
-30 °C to 30 °C:
Liebherr Motor oil 5W-30, Specification ACEA E4
Lube oil change intervals

Change intervals: See section “Maintenance and Inspection schedule”.
Oil change intervals depend on climate zone, sulfur content in fuel and oil quality,
as noted in the chart below.
If the noted annual operating hours (h) are not reached, change the Diesel engine
oil and filters at least once a year.
Various aggravating factors (difficult operating conditions) change the mainte-
nance interval.
Aggravating factors may be:
– repeated cold starts
– Sulfur content in fuel
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
– Operating temperature
If aggravating factors are present, then the oil and filter change must be carried out
according to the following chart.
Aggravating factor Oil specification

CH-4,
CI-4
E4, E7A)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
182 PR734-1481 / 13743
Aggravating factor Oil specification

Operating conditions Sulfur content in fuel Interval
Climate normal to -10 °C up to 0.5% 250 hB) 500 hB)
above 0.5% to 1% 125 hB) 250 hB)
below -10 °C up to 0.5% 125 hB) 250 hB)
not permis-
above 0.5% to 1%
sible 125 hB)
Tab. 20: See Oil change intervals depending on aggravating factors
A) TBN at least 13 mgKOH/g

B) Operating hours
Oil specifi-
Aggravating factor
cation
E6
Operating conditions Sulfur content in fuel Interval
up to 0.005% 500 hB)
Climate normal to -10 °C above 0.005% to 0.05% 250 hB)
above 0.0501% to 0.1% 125 hB)
up to 0.005% 250 hB)
below -10 °C above 0.005% to 0.05% 125 hB)

not permis-
above 0.0501% to 0.1%
sible
Tab. 21: See Oil change intervals depending on aggravating factors
5.3.4 Coolant for Diesel engines
General recommendations
The cooling system only functions reliably if it is under pretension pressure. For
that reason, it is essential that it is kept clean and tight, that the cooler lock and
working valves function correctly and that the required coolant level is retained.
Antifreeze fluids with corrosion inhibitors approved by Liebherr ensure sufficient
cold, corrosion and cavitation protection, they do not affect the seals and hoses
and do not foam.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Coolant, which contains unsuitable antifreeze fluids with corrosion inhibitors or is

prepared incorrectly can cause failure of aggregates and components in the
cooling circuit due to cavitation and corrosion damage.
In addition, heat insulating deposits can be created on heat transferring compo-
nents, which lead to overheating and finally to engine failure.
Water (Fresh water)

Suitable is colorless, clear drinkable tap water free of mechanical contaminants
with the following limiting analysis values.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 183
Sea water, brackish water, brine and industrial wastewater are not suitable.
Description Value and unit

Total of alkaline earths (water hardness) 0.6 mmol/l to 3.6 mmol/l (3 to 20°d)
Ph value at 20 °C 6.5 to 8.5
Chloride ion content max. 80 mg/l
Sulfate ion content max. 100 mg/l
Tab. 22: Fresh water quality
Description Value and unit

Total of alkaline earths (water hardness) 0.6 mmol/l to 2.7 mmol/l (3 to 15°d)
Ph value at 20 °C 6.5 to 8.0
Chloride ion content max. 80 mg/l
Sulfate ion content max. 80 mg/l
Tab. 23: Fresh water quality when using DCAA)
A) Diesel Coolant Additives

Contact the local public authorities for drinking water analysis.
Coolant mixing ratio

The cooling system must contain at least 50% antifreeze fluid with corrosion inhib-
itor all year round.
Outside tempera- Mixing ratio

ture to
Water % Antifreeze fluid
with corrosion
inhibitor %
-37 °C 50 50
-50 °C 40 60
Tab. 24: Mixing ratio (all year round)

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 281: Temperature dependent selection of mixing ratio of water + antifreeze

fluid with corrosion inhibitor

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
184 PR734-1481 / 13743
NOTICE
Ratio of antifreeze fluid with corrosion inhibitor in coolant too high!
Diesel engine overheats and can be damaged.
u Do not use more than 60% antifreeze fluid with corrosion inhibitor.
Approved antifreeze fluids with corrosion inhibitor
Product description Manufacturer

Liebherr Antifreeze OS Concentrate Liebherr
Tab. 25: antifreeze fluid with corrosion inhibitor
Note
Improper mixing of various products can impair the properties of the coolant and
damage the cooling system.
u Use only approved products, do not mix different products.
u Never mix silicate containing and silicate free products.
If the Liebherr antifreeze with corrosion inhibitor is not available locally:
u Consult with Liebherr Service; use products according to the “Coolant specifica-
tion for Liebherr Diesel engines”.
Approved premixed antifreeze fluids with corrosion

inhibitor

Liebherr Antifreeze OS Mix Liebherr
Tab. 26: Premixed antifreeze fluids with corrosion inhibitor
Mix = prepared mix (50% water and 50% antifreeze fluid with corrosion inhibitor)
Note
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Approved corrosion inhibitors without antifreeze

protection
In exceptional cases and in constant ambient temperatures above freezing, for
example in tropical regions, where there is definitely no approved antifreeze fluid
with corrosion inhibitor available, water may be mixed with the following inhibitors:
– Product DCA 4 (Diesel Coolant Additives 4)
– Product Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 185
In this case, the coolant must be changed annually.

Check the concentration during maintenance work and correct, if necessary.
Note
u Drain the entire coolant before changing from corrosion inhibitor - antifreeze to
corrosion inhibitor and vice versa.

Fleetguard /
DCA 4 Diesel Coolant Additives Cummins Filtra-
tion
Caltex XL Corrosion Inhibitor Concentrate Chevron Texaco
Chevron Heavy Duty Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite
Chevron Texaco
Free (ELC)
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor (XLI) Chevron Texaco
Total WT Supra Total WT Supra
Tab. 27: Corrosion inhibitor
5.3.5 Hydraulic oil

According to the following data, oils can be used as hydraulic oil.
Maximum water content of hydraulic oil: < 0,1 %
Liebherr Hydraulic oil

Liebherr recommends the following hydraulic oils for the machine, depending on
the temperature range:
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
186 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 283: Liebherr Hydraulic oil, temperature dependent selection of viscosity clas-
sification
A Ambient temperature C Operating range
B Cold start range with warm up
guideline
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus and Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic are suitable for bio
as well as for long term use.
If Liebherr oils are not available locally, then engine oils according to the following
paragraph "Engine oil as hydraulic oil" must be used (after consultation with Lieb-
herr Service).
Engine oil as hydraulic oil

When using engine oils (third party products), we recommend to check with the oil
manufacturer first to ensure that the following specifications are met by this third
party product.
Engine oils for use as hydraulic oil must be selected according to the following
data:
Single grade oils (1) API - CD / ACEA - E1

(MB 226.0 and 227.0)
Multi grade oils (2) API - CD, CE, CF / ACEA - E2, E3, E4
(MB 227.5, 228.1, 228.3 and 228.5)
Tab. 28: Classification, Engine oil for use as hydraulic oil

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 187
Fig. 284: Engine oil for use as hydraulic oil, temperature dependent selection of
viscosity classification 9)
A Ambient temperature 1 Single-grade oils
B Cold start range with warm up 2 Multi-grade oils
guideline
C Operating range
Warm up specification
The black bar B marks the ambient temperatures, which are up to 20 °C below the
operating range C.
If a cold start is made at ambient temperatures within range B, the following warm
up specification for hydraulic oil applies:
1. After starting, set the Diesel engine to medium rpm (to no more than maximum
half of the highest rpm).
2. Carefully actuate the working hydraulic. Actuate the hydraulic cylinder and
move it to stop for a short period.
3. After approx. 5 minutes actuate the travel hydraulic too. Total warm up period
is approx. 10 minutes.
If the cold start is made at even lower ambient temperatures, the following warm up
procedure applies: Warm up the hydraulic tank first before starting the engine.
Then start the warm up specification with Pt. 1.
Biodegradable hydraulic oils
NOTICE
Improper mixing of hydraulic oils!
Mixing biodegradable hydraulic oils on ester basis or with mineral oils can cause
aggressive reactions. Damage to the hydraulic system will be the result.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Do not mix biodegradable hydraulic oils made by various manufacturers and do

not mix them with mineral oils.
Liebherr recommends the following hydraulic oils for the machine, depending on
the temperature range: Liebherr Hydraulic Plus or Liebherr Hydraulic Plus
Arctic.
9) In case of deviating viscosity classification: Check with Service Dept.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
188 PR734-1481 / 13743
When using these hydraulic oils, an auxiliary flow filtration system is not necessa-
rily required.
If these oils are not available locally, then only oils based on fully saturated
synthetic ester (HEES) may be used (after consultation with Liebherr Service).
When using synthetic ester based oils, we recommend that hydraulic hoses are
changed after 4000 operating hours or no later than after four years of use.
Plant-based oils are not permissible for use due to their insufficient temperature
properties.
Polyglycoles can be used due to their paint and sealing incompatibility in special
cases, but only after consultation with Liebherr Service.
When using third party products, we recommend to check with the manufacturer
first to ensure that the above stated specifications are met by this third party
product.
Oil change, oil analysis, filter change
Oil change
Note
Liebherr recommends operation with regular oil analysis.
u For additional information, see: Oil analysis
Oil grade Oil change

no bio use Bio use (only permissible
without oil analysis with oil analysisA) with oil analysisA) )
(optional)
Liebherr Mineral oil every 3000 h every 6000 h --C)
Liebherr-PAO B) every 4000 h every 8000 h every 8000 h
Third party product - Mineral oil every 2000 h every 2000 h --C)
Third party product - Fully satu- --C) --C) every 2000 h
rated synthetic ester
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Tab. 29: Oil change intervals
A) If the result of the oil analysis is positive, then oil may be used for a longer period. If the result of the oil analysis
is negative, then the oil must be changed immediately.
B) PAO = Poly-alpha-olefin
C) Combination is not permissible
Bio use means that the use of biodegradable or environmentally friendly hydraulic
oil is specified at the jobsite of the machine.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 189
If a machine is operated less than 1000 hours per year, then an oil sample must be
taken once a year. Hydraulic oil with longer use in the machine should be changed
at least after four years (mineral oils and fully saturated synthetic ester) as well as
no later than after six years (Liebherr Plus oils).
If a machine is not in use for longer than six month without a break, then an oil
analysis is required before putting the machine back into service.
Oil analysis
Liebherr recommends to have the oil analyzed regularly by OELCHECK and to
carry out the oil change according to the lab report:
– yellow set for biodegradable hydraulic oils
– green set for mineral oils
See also Service and product information.

Reasons for regular oil analysis:
– Cost savings due to longer oil change intervals.
– Information about hydraulic system, components and media
– Environmental and resource protection
Oil sample removal / application condition

Oil sample removal on machines in normal application
Oil sample removal on machines in dust intensive application
The frequency of taking the oil sample depends on the application conditions.
Tab. 30: Legend: Oil sample removal depending on application condition
Oil grade Oil sample removal

no bio use (oil analysis optional) Bio use (oil analysis required)
Liebherr Mineral oil every 1000 h every 250 h --B) --B)

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Liebherr-PAO A) every 1000 h every 250 h first at 0 h, then first at 0 h, then

every 1000 h every 250 h
Third party product - Mineral oil first at 1000 h, every 250 h --B) --B)
then every 500 h
Third party product - Fully satu- --B) -B) first at 0 h, then first at 0 h, then
rated synthetic ester every 500 h every 250 h
Tab. 31: Oil sample removal depending on application condition

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
190 PR734-1481 / 13743
A) PAO = Poly-alpha-olefin
B) Combination is not permissible
Filter change
Filter change / application condition

Filter change on machines in normal application
Filter change on machines in dust intensive application
The frequency for changing the filter depends on the application conditions.
Tab. 32: Legend: Filter change depending on application condition
Change return filter (only Liebherr filters may be used)
every 1000 h every 500 h
Tab. 33: Filter change depending on application condition
Change auxiliary flow oil filter

Liebherr Filter Filters made by other manufacturers
every 2000 h or according to display every 500 h every 250 h
Tab. 34: Filter change depending on application condition
5.3.6 Lube oils for splitterboxes
Quality
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Recommended lubricant Specification

Liebherr Hypoid 85W-140 EP API: GL5
MIL-L: 2105 D, PRF-2105 E
Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS API: GL5
MIL-L: 2105 D

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 191

Liebherr Gear Hypoid 90 EP API: GL5
MIL-L: 2105 B, C, D
Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75W-90 API: GL4, GL-5, MT-1
MIL-L: 2105 D, PRF-2105 E
If Liebherr oils are not available locally, then oils according to the specification must
be used instead (after consulting with the respective Service Dept.).
Viscosity

Ambient temperature
The selection of lube oil viscosity is made according to the SAE classification
(Society of Automotive Engineers). The SAE classification provides no information
about the quality of a lube oil. The ambient temperature is decisive in the correct
selection of the SAE classification. The function of axles and gears can be
adversely affected due to incorrect viscosity.
5.3.7 Lube oils for travel gear
Quality
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

Liebherr Hypoid 85W-140 EP API: GL5
MIL-L: 2105 D, PRF-2105 E
Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75W-90 API: GL4, GL-5, MT-1
MIL-L: 2105 D, PRF-2105 E

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
192 PR734-1481 / 13743
If Liebherr oils are not available locally, then oils according to the specification must
be used instead (after consulting with the respective Service Dept.).
Viscosity

A Ambient temperature
The selection of lube oil viscosity is made according to the SAE classification
(Society of Automotive Engineers). The SAE classification provides no information
about the quality of a lube oil. The ambient temperature is decisive in the correct
selection of the SAE classification. The function of axles and gears can be
adversely affected due to incorrect viscosity.
5.3.8 Oil for duo cone (slipring) seal Travel gear

Hydraulic oil, see Hydraulic system
Use the same oil quality and viscosity as in the hydraulic system.
5.3.9 Oil for axle bearing

Hydraulic oil, see Hydraulic system
Use the same oil quality and viscosity as in the hydraulic system.
5.3.10 Grease and other lubricants

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The grease is used for automatic or manual lubrication of the machine. The grease
gets to the lube points via the central lubrication system or via grease fittings.
Example:
– Pins, axles and screws
– Attached tools

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 193
Note
The grease must be well deliverable within the entire ambient temperature range!
u Use only approved grease products.
u For retrofit central lubrication systems, pay attention to the specifications for
deliverability of grease products.
Minimum quality requirements

Grease products must meet the following minimum quality requirements.
Area of appli-
Specification Identification
cation
Standard
Soap based (Lithium complex) KP 2 K (DIN 51502)
version
NLGI grade: 2 (DIN 51818)
VKA welding load: ≥ 2300 N (DIN 51350 / 4 — ASTM D 2596)
Low tempera-
Soap based (Lithium complex) KP 1 K (DIN 51502)
ture
NLGI grade: 1(DIN 51818 / ASTM D 2596)
VKA welding load: ≥ 2300 N (DIN 51350 / 4 — ASTM D 2596)
Tab. 37: Grease and other lubricants
Liebherr grease
Liebherr recommends the following grease products to obtain optimum lubrication
results and additional protection from corrosion.
Area of appli-
Recommended lubricant Specification Identification
cation
Standard Liebherr Universalfett 9900 Soap based KPF 2 N — 25 (DIN 51502)
version (Lithium complex)
VKA welding load: ≥ 5500 N (DIN 51350 /
4)
with vapor phase corrosion protection
Low tempera- Liebherr Universalfett Arctic Soap based KPFHC 1 N — 60 (DIN 51502)
ture (Lithium complex)
VKA welding load: ≥ 5500 N (DIN 51350 /
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
4)
Tab. 38: Grease and other lubricants
The temperature application ranges for Liebherr grease have been determined as
follows:

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
194 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 307: Temperature application ranges for Liebherr grease products

A Not used in central lubrication B Short term temperature peaks to
systems 200 °C
Grease for automatic grease central lubrication system

Grease with high pressure additives (EP-grease) is recommended.
Use only grease with the same saponification type.
NOTICE
Unsuitable solid lubricants!
Solid lubricants (such as graphite) can plug up or damage the central lubrication
system.
u Use grease according to above chart.
5.3.11 Oil for hinges and joints
Lubricate hinges and joints without grease fittings with engine oil.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 195
Take oil samples
5.4 Take oil samples
5.4.1 Taking oil samples and oil analysis

Contrary to the data in these operating instructions, the left engine compartment
door may be opened while the Diesel engine is running to take an oil sample.
WARNING
Turning and hot engine parts!
When touching hot or turning engine parts, severe injuries can occur.
u Do not touch hot exhaust lines and engine parts.
u Do not wear ties, scarves, open jackets and loose clothing.
Take the oil sample:

– Via the oil sample removal valves (hydraulic oil, engine oil, coolant).
– Shortly after shutting down the machine – at that time dirt and wear particles are
still floating and any water in the system has not yet settled.
– At operating temperature - warm oil can be removed quicker.
– Always in the same manner and at the same location.
– Never from the filter.
– Not shortly after an oil change or after large amounts of oil have been added.
– Only in a clean and dry sample container.
– With the manual suction pump, dip the hose approx. in the center of the oil
volume.
Locations for taking oil samples
Hydraulic system
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 310: SP-connection on hydraulic
SP-connection 2 via mini test hose

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
196 PR734-1481 / 13743
Take oil samples
Fig. 311: Breather screw on the hydraulic tank
Take an oil sample: On the breather screw on the hydraulic tank, via the manual
suction pump
u Take an oil sample on the respective location.
Diesel engine
Fig. 312: Oil dipstick tube on Diesel engine
With the manual suction pump via the oil dipstick tube.
When changing the oil from the emerging oil flow.
Splitterbox
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 313: Oil dipstick tube on the splitterbox

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 197
Take oil samples
With the manual suction pump via the oil dipstick tube on the splitterbox.
When changing the oil from the emerging oil flow.
Travel gear
Fig. 314: Oil filler port on the travel gear
With a manual suction pump via the oil filler port on the travel gear.
Cooling system
Make sure that the cooling system has cooled off.
Fig. 315: Filler neck on the cooler
Take an oil sample: Via the filler neck on the cooler.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
198 PR734-1481 / 13743
Take oil samples
CAUTION
At or near operating temperature, the engine cooling system is hot and under pres-
sure!
Danger of scalding when opening the cooler cap when the engine cooling system
is hot.
u Open the cap of the filler neck of the expansion tank only when the engine has
cooled off.
u Open the cap of the expansion tank only after it is cool enough to touch. Turn
the cap carefully to relieve the pressure.
u Make sure to avoid skin contact with the coolant, observe the manufacturer's
guidelines.
u In case of an accidental splash, flush eyes or skin immediately with plenty of
water.
u Take a coolant sample on the respective location.
Oil analysis
An oil analysis should include at least the following data:
Method Determination of
Atomic Emission Spectroscopy Wear metals, additives, contaminants iron,
(AES) chromium, tin, aluminum, nickel, copper, lead,
molybdenum, silver, silicium, callum, calcium,
magnesium, borax, zinc, phosphorus, barium
FT Infrared spectroscopy (FT-IR), Oil condition and contaminants: Oil oxidation,
glycol, water, nitrates, fuel, carbon
Viscosity Viscosity test Viscosity at 40°C and 100°C:
Viscosity index Information for lubricity and
mixture
Analex PQ-Index Magnetic metal wear debris: Statement
regarding the quantity of collected magnetize-
able iron abrasion in oil larger than 5 microns
Tab. 39: Data oil analysis
Liebherr recommends that regular oil analyses be carried out by the company
OELCHECK and that oil changes are performed on the basis of the lab report (see
also Service and product information).
A kit of sample bottles, removal hose, sample documentation and mailing bags are
available from Liebherr under the following Id. No.:
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
– Id. No.: 70 18,369 (12 units)

– Id. No.: 70 18 368 (6 units)
– Id. No.: 81 45 666, Hand pump for taking samples (not included in kit.)
u Have oil analysis carried out.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 199
Preparatory maintenance tasks
5.5 Preparatory maintenance tasks
5.5.1 Safety instructions for maintenance

Before performing any maintenance tasks, the machine must be put into park posi-
tion unless expressly indicated otherwise in the machine documentation.
Various maintenance work includes, for example:
– lubricating the attachment,
– checking the oil level or changing the oil in the diesel engine, splitter box, travel
gearbox, hydraulic tank etc.
– changing the filter as well as maintenance work on the hydraulic system.
It is essential that all accident prevention guidelines are observed when
carrying out maintenance work!
Make sure that there is constant visual contact between the operator in the opera-
tor's cab and the maintenance staff.
Fig. 316: Visual contact
WARNING
If there is no visual contact with the operator, there is severe risk of accidents for
the maintenance staff!
u Never move unnoticed into the danger zone of the machine.
u Before entering the danger zone, establish contact with the operator.
5.5.2 Maintenance position

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The basic maintenance position is described below.

It allows access to the individual maintenance points.
Bring the machine into maintenance position

(For more information see: 3.3 Operation, page 88)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
200 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 317: Maintenance position
u Park the machine on level ground.

u Lower the attachment completely.

u Pull the ignition key.
Turn the battery master switch off

The battery master switch is on the right rear in the battery compartment.
u Before leaving the machine or before maintenance and repair work, turn the
battery master switch off.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 201
u Set the battery master switch to position “0” .

u For welding work on the machine observe the safety guidelines (For more infor-
mation see: 2.4.11 Safety guidelines for welding work on the machine ,
page 48) .
Open the engine compartment door and remove the

covers
When the door is open or covers are removed, access is provided to the following
aggregates and components:
– Diesel engine
– Cooling system
– Air filter
– Splitterbox
Open the right engine compartment door
Fig. 320: Open only if the engine is not running
WARNING
Turning engine parts!
Clothing, hair or limbs can be caught by the fan blade or the V-belt and be pulled
in. Severe injuries may be the result.
u Open the engine compartment doors only when the engine is not running.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 321: Open the engine compartment doors
u Open the lock with the key.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
202 PR734-1481 / 13743
WARNING
Falling engine compartment door due to defective gas cylinder!
u Before starting to work underneath the door, check if the completely opened
door position is ensured by the gas cylinder.
u Open the door: Fold the handle outward, turn by 90° and fold the door up.
w The engine compartment door is held in this position by a gas cylinder.
If the function is not ensured:
u Find the cause and remedy it immediately.
Fig. 322: Pneumatic strut
u Check the pneumatic strut.
Remove the covers

Access to additional maintenance points is provided after removing the cover plate
on the bottom as well as the cover on the left.
Remove the cover plate on the lower right

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 323: Remove the cover plate
CAUTION
During the entire working procedure, pay attention to good stability.
u If the placement location is unsuitable, there is a danger of injury due to falling
covers.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 203
u Remove the mounting screws on the cover plate.

u Lift the cover plate and remove.
u Place the cover plate on the ground.
Remove the cover plates on the left
CAUTION
During the entire working procedure, pay attention to good stability.
u If the placement location is unsuitable, there is a danger of injury due to falling
covers.
u Remove the mounting screws on the upper cover plate.

u Lift the cover plate and remove.
u Place the cover plate on the ground.
u Repeat the working steps for the removal of the lower cover plate.
u After completion of maintenance work, reinstall the covers properly in reverse
order.
5.5.3 Turn the electrical system off

Adhere to the following procedure for welding work or work on the electrical system
of the machine:
u Turn the battery master switch off.
u Attach the ground of the welding unit as close as possible to the welding loca-
tion.
u Welding on the machine only by authorized expert personnel.
5.5.4 Lift the operator's cab

Ensure that the following requirements are met:
q The machine is in the maintenance position.
q Suitable load lifting equipment and a lifting device are available.
The operator's platform can be tilted to replace, clean, check and repair the units
between the engine compartment and the reservoir.
DANGER
Danger of crushing between operator's platform and machine!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Personnel remaining under the unsecured operator's platform can be crushed

between the operator's platform and the machine.
u Raise the operator's platform only when the machine is at a standstill.
u When raising and lowering the operator's platform, ensure that nobody is within
the tilt range.
u Install the retaining pin.
u Do not start up or drive the machine with the operator's platform tilted.
u Leave the safety lever in the up position.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
204 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 324: Fastening - lifting points on the operator's platform
u Fasten suitable load lifting equipment (belt, chain, etc.) to the fastening points
provided on the operator's platform.
Fig. 325: Mounting screws on the operator's platform
u Remove 5 hex head screws on each side on the operator’s platform.

u Close both operator's cab doors and all windows.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 326: End position
u Use a lifting device (crane) to lift the operator's platform to the end position.
(Intermediate positions are prohibited!).
WARNING
Danger of accident!
u Remaining in the danger area is prohibited.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 205
Fig. 327: Remove the retaining pin
u Use pins to secure the support leg at the location provided (bore).
u Secure the pin with a cotter pin to prevent it slipping out.
u Lower the operator's platform slightly until the load lifting equipment hangs
loosely.
u If necessary, the load lifting equipment can be unhooked.
5.5.5 Lower the operator's cab
DANGER
u Lower the operator's platform only when the machine is at a standstill.
u When raising and lowering the operator's platform, make sure that there are no
persons within the tilt range.
u Install the retaining pin.
u Do not start or drive the machine with tilted operator's platform.
u Lift the operator's platform with the load lifting equipment.

w The retaining pin is relieved.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 328: Remove retaining pin
u Release the cotter pin on the retaining pin.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
206 PR734-1481 / 13743
u Remove the retaining pin.

u Lower the operator's platform with the load lifting device to the lowest point.
DANGER
Danger of injury due to unsecured operator's platform!
u Lower the operator's platform and secure with screws.
Fig. 329: Attach the operator's platform
u Attach the operator's platform with 5 hex head screws each per side.
u The machine is ready to operate.
5.5.6 Lift the operator's cab hydraulically

q The machine is in maintenance position.
q An extension pipe to actuate the hand pump is available.
To replace, clean, check and repair the aggregates between the engine compart-
ment and the reservoir, the operator's platform can be tilted.
DANGER
u Raise the operator's platform only when the machine is at a standstill.
u Place the safety support bar.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en


PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 207
Fig. 330: Mounting screws operator's platform
u Remove 5 hex head screws on each side on the operator’s platform.

u Close both operator's cab doors.
u Open the central electric compartment door.
Fig. 331: Hand pump on position “Up”
u Set the lever on the hand pump to “Up”.

u Insert the extension pipe into the hand pump.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 332: Actuate the hand pump
u Actuate the hydraulic hand pump until the piston has reached the end position
(intermediate positions are prohibited!).

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
208 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 333: Turn the support plate by 90°
u Turn the mechanical support plate on the hydraulic cylinder in clockwise direc-
tion by 90°.
w Handle on the support plate is positioned laterally to the travel direction of
the machine.
Fig. 334: Hand pump on position “Down”
u Set the lever on the hand pump to "Down".

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 335: Safety support bar
u Actuate the hand pump until the safety support bar is placed on the support
plate.
5.5.7 Lower the operator's cab hydraulically


PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 209
DANGER
Danger of crushing between operator's platform and machine
u Lower the operator's platform only when the machine is at a standstill.
u Place the safety support bar.
Fig. 336: Hand pump on position “Up”
u Set the lever on the hand pump to "Up".

u Raise the operator's platform by actuating the hand pump.
Fig. 337: Turn the support plate by 90°

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Relieve the safety support bar with a slight thumb pressure and turn the support
plate by the handle in counterclockwise direction by 90° to the front.
w Handle on the support plate is in travel direction on the front.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
210 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 338: Hand pump on position “Down”
u Set the lever on the hand pump to “Down”

u Actuate the hand pump.
w The operator's platform is lowered.
As soon as the operator's platform is placed on the operator's platform bearings,
actuate the hand pump until the relief pressure valve in the cylinder is triggered
(whistling noise). This ensures that the hydraulic cylinder for the operator’s cab tilt
device is completely moved in and relieved.
DANGER
Danger of injury due to unsecured operator's platform.
u Lower the operator's platform and attach it with screws before starting the
Diesel engine.
Fig. 339: Attach the operator's platform
u Attach the operator's platform with 5 hex head screws each per side.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 211
Overall machine
5.6 Overall machine
5.6.1 Lubricating the working attachment and hoist cylinder

bearing
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position.
Lubricating the working attachment
WARNING
Work under raised working attachment!
If personnel remains under a raised and non-supported working attachment,
personnel can be crushed.
u Before carrying out any maintenance work, lower the working attachment.
u Turn the engine off and actuate all functions to relieve the pressure in all lines.
u Support the working attachment properly, if necessary.
u Clean the grease nipple and lubricate all lubricating points according to the
lubrication chart.
Lubricating the hoist cylinder bearing

The hoist cylinders are connected via a rotatable fork with the main frame. These
bearings are filled with grease.
Fig. 340: Hoist cylinder bearing

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Clean the grease nipple and lubricate the lubricating points.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
212 PR734-1481 / 13743
Overall machine
5.6.2 Check the windshield wiper
Correct the windshield wiper position

The wiper blade must be positioned vertically to the window.
u Set the wiper blade vertically: Release the lock screw on the windshield wiper
arm and adjust the length of the guide arm.
Change the wiper blade
Fig. 341: Windshield wiper
u Fold the wiper arm up.

u Remove the nut on the mounting screw.
u Remove the spring ring and washer and pull the mounting screw out.
u Remove and change the wiper blade.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 213
Diesel engine
5.7 Diesel engine
5.7.1 Check the engine oil level

q The right engine compartment door is open.
u After turning the engine off, wait for a short time until the oil has collected in the
oil pan.
Fig. 342: Dipstick

1 Dipstick
u Pull the dipstick 1 out, wipe it off with a clean cloth and insert it to the stop.
u Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level. The oil level must be between
the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 343: Add oil

2 Dipstick
If the oil level is too low:
u Remove the oil filler cap 2 and add oil.
u Add oil via the filler neck.
u Check the oil level again.
u Do not fill the Diesel engine past the “MAX” mark with oil.
u Clean the filler cap, set it on the filler neck and tighten.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
214 PR734-1481 / 13743
Diesel engine
5.7.2 Change the engine oil

q The engine oil is warm.
q An appropriate container and drain hose with valve connection is available.
q The correct oil quality and amount is on hand.
Fig. 344: Belly pan cover
u Remove the belly pan cover 1.
WARNING
Restricted space conditions and heavy weight of belly pans!
Danger of injury due to difficult removal.
u Use suitable lifting devices to remove the belly pans.
u In case of strong material deposits in the belly pan area, remove the belly pans
and clean them.
CAUTION
Hot oil!
When draining hot engine oil, there is a danger of scalding.
u Avoid skin contact with engine oil.
u When changing the oil, wear protective gloves.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 345: Oil drain valve

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 215
Diesel engine
u Remove the cap on the drain valve.

u Install the oil drain hose on the oil drain valve and let the oil drain into a suitable
container.
u Remove the oil drain hose and reinstall the cap on the oil drain valve.
To be able to drain the used engine oil completely from the Diesel engine, the oil
from the oil pan (small sump) must also be drained.
Fig. 346: Plug
u Remove the plug 2.

u Drain the oil (approx. 3 l ) into the provided container.
u Install the plug 2.
u Install the belly pan cover.
Fig. 347: Add oil
u Add fresh oil via the filler neck to the “MAX” mark on the dipstick.
u Clean the filler cap, set it on the oil filler neck and tighten.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

w The indicator light - Diesel engine problem turns off shortly after start.
u Turn the Diesel engine off and check the oil level on the dipstick after approx.
1-2 minutes.
u If necessary, correct the oil level.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
216 PR734-1481 / 13743
Diesel engine
5.7.3 Change the lube oil filter

q The engine oil has been drained.
q Two Liebherr oil filter cartridges are available.
Fig. 348: Filter cartridges
u Place a suitable container under the Diesel engine.
Note
u When changing the oil filter cartridges, protect the V-belt from emerging oil.
u After the oil filter change, remove all traces of oil from the Diesel engine, even
behind the vibration damper, to avoid subsequent diagnosis of a radial shaft
seal ring leak.
u Loosen the oil filter cartridges 1 with the filter wrench and unscrew the filter.
u Clean the sealing surfaces on the filter bracket.
u Remove the old filter seal and its remains completely.
u Lubricate the rubber seal rings on the new filter cartridges thinly with engine oil.
u Screw on the new oil filter cartridges, until the seal ring is seated on the filter
bracket
When the seal ring is seated on the filter bracket:
u Tighten the oil filter cartridge by 3/4 to 1 turn (tightening torque 20 Nm - 5 Nm).
w The indicator light Diesel engine problem turns off shortly after start.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Turn the engine off, check the oil filters for leaks and check the oil level.
u If necessary, correct the oil level.
5.7.4 Diesel engine: Check the arrangement and belly pans

for contamination and clean

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 217
Diesel engine
Diesel engine arrangement and belly pans

u Check the entire engine compartment for damage and contamination.
u In case it is very dirty, clean the engine arrangement and the belly pan area.
Diesel engine
NOTICE
Moisture infiltrates electrical components!
Infiltrating moisture causes contact corrosion and failure of test function.
u Do not expose electrical test sensors, such as oil pressure switches to a direct
jet of water or steam.
u Clean the engine carefully with steam jet.
5.7.5 Check and change the V-belt
The V-belt is self-tensioning and maintenance free.

Only the V-belt and the tension pulleys need to be checked for damage or wear,
Access for testing is possible from the right engine side.
Always replace broken or damaged belts with new belts.
Check the V-belt arrangement

Damage on the V-belt includes:
– Broken web belts
– Lateral cracks through several web belts
– Rubber lumps in the base of the belt
– Inclusions of dirt or rocks
– Web belts loosened from the belt base
– Lateral cracks on the back LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 349: Ribbed V-belt
u Check the V-belt for damage.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
218 PR734-1481 / 13743
Diesel engine
u Check the V-belt and tension pulley for proper condition and play (for example
for profile wear of belt pulleys, damage of tension pulley).
Note
u Replace damaged parts immediately.
Change the V-belt
Fig. 350: Change the V-belt
u Insert a ratchet with 12.5 mm, into the square hole 2 of the tension device 1.
u Swing the tension device 1 back against the spring force in counterclockwise
direction to the stop and remove the V-belt.
u Check the V-belt and tension pulley for proper condition and play (for example
for profile wear of belt pulleys, damage of tension pulley, kicked out bearings).
Note
u Replace damaged parts immediately.
u Place the new V-belt, with the tension device 1 swung back, on all belt pulleys
and the tension pulley.
u Bring the tension device 1 again to the tensioned position.
5.7.6 Check the Diesel engine arrangement for leaks and

condition

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
q The engine compartment doors are open.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 219
Diesel engine
Fig. 351: Diesel engine arrangement
u Check the entire engine arrangement for condition and leaks.
Note
u Pay attention to leaky fuel lines!
u Replace damaged seals immediately.
5.7.7 Check the supply and exhaust lines for mounting and
leaks

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 352: Intake and exhaust lines
u Check the intake lines between turbocharger, charge air cooler and engine for
leaks and mounting.
u Check the exhaust lines between engine and turbocharger, particle filter, muffler
and exhaust manifold for leaks and mounting.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
220 PR734-1481 / 13743
Diesel engine
5.7.8 Change the oil separator filter insert
The oil separator is installed on the flywheel side on the right hand side of the
Diesel engine.
q An original Liebherr oil separator filter insert is available.
Fig. 353: Oil separator
u Clean the oil separator and surrounding area carefully.

u Open the oil separator cap and remove.
Fig. 354: Oil separator filter insert
u Pull the oil separator filter insert out and dispose of it in an environmentally
friendly manner.
u Insert the new oil separator filter insert and push it in to the stop.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Turn the oil separator cap to close true to side and tighten by hand to the stop.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 221
Diesel engine
5.7.9 Check the electrical system of the Diesel engine
Fig. 355: Control unit mounting
u Check the control unit mounting for damage and tight seating.
Troubleshooting
Is the control unit mounting damaged?
u Do not start the Diesel engine.
u Replace all bearings.
5.7.10 Diesel engine: Check all sensors and cable connec-

tions for tight seating and condition
Fig. 356: Sensory and cable connections

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Check all sensors and cable connections for tight seating and condition.
u Check all cables and wiring harness to ensure they are not damaged and that
they are routed to prevent them from rubbing and chafing and that they are
attached properly.
Troubleshooting
Are cable connections, wiring harness or sensors damaged?
u Do not start the Diesel engine.
u Replace defective parts.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
222 PR734-1481 / 13743
Diesel engine
5.7.11 Check the vibration damper
Fig. 357: Vibration damper
u Check the vibration damper for distortion.
Troubleshooting
If a distortion of the vibration damper is found:
u Do not start the engine.
u Replace the vibration damper.
5.7.12 Check the engine mount, oil pan and engine brackets
u Check the oil pan for tight seating, retighten the screws if necessary.
u Check the Diesel engine brackets and engine mount for condition and tight
seating, retighten the screws if necessary.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 223
Cooling system
5.8 Cooling system
5.8.1 Check the coolant level
The coolant expansion tank with the filler neck is located in the engine compart-
ment.
Access to the filler neck is provided via a flap in the engine cover.
With the Diesel engine turned off, the coolant must be visible in the sight gauge.
When the Diesel engine is warm, the coolant level may also be somewhat higher.
Fig. 358: Container Coolant
If the coolant level is too low:

u Add coolant.
5.8.2 Add coolant

The coolant to be added must provide the correct antifreeze concentration.
sure!
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 359: Danger of scalding

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
224 PR734-1481 / 13743
Cooling system
CAUTION
At or near operating temperature, the cooling system is hot and under pressure!
Danger of scalding due to splashing hot coolant.
cooled off.
u Never add coolant when the engine is hot.
Fig. 360: Open the flap
u Open the flap on the upper side of the engine hood.
Fig. 361: Open the cap
u Turn the cap 2 a little in counterclockwise direction to relieve the pressure, then
open it.
CAUTION
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Coolant can cause eye injuries and allergic skin reactions.

u Avoid skin contact with coolant.
u Observe the manufacturer's guidelines.
u When mixing coolant, wear rubber gloves and safety glasses.
water.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 225
Cooling system
Fig. 362: Container Coolant
u Add coolant.
w Add coolant to the center of sight gauge.
u Set the cap 2 on the expansion tank and tighten.
u Close the flap on the engine hood.
5.8.3 Check the cooling system

Check the cooler lock
Fig. 363: Cooler lock
u Check the cooler lock 2 for leaks.
5.8.4 Check the antifreeze concentration in the coolant

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The coolant must contain all year round at least a concentration of antifreeze fluid
of 50 % per volume, but not more than 60 % per volume. A coolant with 50 % anti-
freeze concentration corresponds to a freeze protection up to approx. -37 °C.
q The engine compartment door is open.
q A testing tool is available.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
226 PR734-1481 / 13743
Cooling system
Check the antifreeze concentration
CAUTION
Near operating temperature, the coolant system is hot and is under pressure!
cooled off.
u Open the cap on the reservoir carefully.

u Take a coolant sample and check the antifreeze concentration with the testing
tool.
If the antifreeze concentration is not reached:
u correct the mixing ratio of the antifreeze in the coolant.
Correct the antifreeze concentration

u For coolant quantity, see fill quantities in chart.
If the antifreeze concentration is too low:
u Drain the coolant and refill pure antifreeze according to the diagram shown
NOTICE
If the corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze fluid concentration is too high, then the cooling
action is reduced.
Danger of damage to the Diesel engine!
u Do not use more than 60 % corrosion inhibitor - antifreeze fluid.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 227
Cooling system
Fig. 364: Determine the refill quantity on example -15 °C

1 Corrosion inhibitor antifreeze 3 maximum antifreeze protec-
fluid (concentrate) refill quan- tion temperature (minus °C)
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
tity (Liter) in cooling system

2 Reference lines 4 Coolant quantity (liter) in
cooling system
If an antifreeze protection temperature of -15 °C is measured in the cooling system,
move along the reference line 2 (starting from the measured antifreeze protection
temperature) the lower left to the vertical line Coolant quantity 4 (50 Liter) and from
this point horizontally to the outer left (14.8 Liter concentrate). This is the refill
quantity of corrosion inhibitor - antifreeze fluid (concentrate) 1, which must be
replenished to obtain an antifreeze protection temperature of -37 °C again. To rees-
tablish the correct mixing ratio, at least the previously determined quantity must be
drained from the cooling system.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
228 PR734-1481 / 13743
Cooling system
u Add the determined amount of pure corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze fluid.

u To obtain the required coolant level, add the remainder again with the previously
drained coolant.
Use of corrosion inhibitor without antifreeze fluid
Use of DCA 4
u Take a coolant sample and analyze with the test kit CC 2602 M by Fleetguard.
u If the analysis does not provide a DCA 4 concentration between 0.6-1.06 units
per liter, then the mixing ratio must be corrected, check the manufacturer's
instructions.
Use of other water-soluble corrosion inhibitors

– Caltex XL Corrosion Inhibitor Concentrate
– Chevron Heavy Duty Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite Free
– Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor (XLI)
– Total WT Supra
The mixing ratio must always show a value of 2.8 +/-0.9 % Brix. This corresponds
to 5-10% of corrosion inhibitor and 95-90% water.
u Take a coolant sample and analyze with refractometer 2710 by Gefo.
Check the mixing ratio with the refractometer

Brix value: Dosage for soluble dry substance in liquid
Fig. 365: Gefo Refractometer No. 2710

1 Refractometer 2 Lens
u Check the mixing ratio.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Test procedure
u Clean the cover and the prism carefully.
u Place 1-2 drops of test fluid on the prism.
w The liquid distributes when the lid is closed.
u Look through the lens 2 against a light background and adjust the scale clearly.
u Adjust the sharpness by turning the lens 2.
u Read the Brix values on the blue dividing line in the lens 2.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 229
Cooling system
Fig. 366: Determination of refill quantity on example 1% Brix

1 Corrosion inhibitor refill quan- 3 Refractometer reading in %
tity (liter) Brix
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
2 Reference lines 4 Coolant quantity (liter) in

cooling system
If a Brix value of 1 % is measured in the cooling system, move along the reference
line 2 (starting from the measured value 1 Brix) the lower left to the vertical line
Coolant quantity in cooling system 4 (50 Liter ) and from this point horizontally to
the outer left (2.4 Liter pure corrosion inhibitor 1). This is the refill quantity of pure
corrosion inhibitor 1 which must be replaced to obtain the required value of 2.8
Brix. To reestablish the correct mixing ratio, at least the previously determined
quantity must be drained from the cooling system.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
230 PR734-1481 / 13743
Cooling system
u Add the determined amount of pure corrosion inhibitor.

u To obtain the required coolant level, add the remainder again with the previously
drained coolant.
5.8.5 Change the coolant

q The heater valve is open.
q A container is available.
q The required amount of coolant is available.
Drain the coolant

sure!
Fig. 367: Danger of scalding
CAUTION
At or near operating temperature, the cooling system is hot and under pressure!
cooled off.
u Open the cap of the expansion tank only after it is cool enough to touch. Then
turn the cap carefully to relieve the pressure.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Turn the cap on the filler neck a little in counterclockwise direction to relieve the
pressure, then open it.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 231
Cooling system
CAUTION
Coolant can cause eye injuries and allergic skin reactions.
u Avoid skin contact with coolant.
u Observe the manufacturer's guidelines.
u When mixing coolant, wear rubber gloves and safety glasses.
water.
Fig. 368: Drain valve on cooler
u Remove the engine compartment cover on the left.

u Place a suitable container under the drain valve.
u Remove the cap on the drain valve.
u Install the drain hose on the drain valve and let the coolant drain into a suitable
container.
u Remove the drain hose and install the cap on the drain valve.
Add coolant
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 369: Add coolant
u Add premixed coolant via the filler neck 2 to the center of the sight gauge.
u Set the cap on the expansion tank and tighten.
u Close the engine compartment doors.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
232 PR734-1481 / 13743
Cooling system
u Set the heater knob to “warm”. Start the Diesel engine and let it run to warm up.
u Check the coolant level again and correct, if necessary.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 233
Fuel system
5.9 Fuel system
5.9.1 Notes for work on the fuel system
Fig. 370: Danger of fire
WARNING
Diesel fuel is easily flammable!
Danger of fire and explosion.
u Do not smoke.
u Avoid open flames.
u Work only when the Diesel engine is turned off and cooled off.
5.9.2 Drain the fuel filter condensation
The fuel prefilter with water separator, water level sensor and integrated manual
refueling pump are located on the right Diesel engine side.
The shut off valve is accessible via the right engine compartment door.
q A sufficiently sized container is available.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 371: Shut off valve of fuel system
u Close the shut off valve for the fuel system.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
234 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
Fig. 372: Drain the fuel filter condensation

1 Filter head 5 Drain plug
2 Manual refueling pump 6 Breather screw
3 Fuel pre-filter cartridge 8 Plug water level sensor
4 Water separator container
u Open the breather screw 6.
u Open the drain plug 5 and drain the condensation into a suitable container until
clean fuel emerges.
When clean fuel emerges:
u Tighten the drain plug 5 and close the breather screw 6 again.
u Open the shut off valve for the fuel system.
5.9.3 Change fuel filter cartridges
Replace the fuel preliminary filter

The fuel prefilter with water separator, water level sensor and integrated manual
refueling pump are located on the right Diesel engine side.
Depending on the Diesel engine scope, the fuel prefilter can be equipped with a
fuel preheater.
q An original Liebherr filter cartridge is available.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 235
Fuel system
Fig. 373: Fuel prefilter cartridge

1 Filter head 5 Drain plug
2 Manual refueling pump 6 Breather screw
3 Fuel prefilter cartridge 8 Plug water level sensor
4 Water separator container
u Set the container under the fuel prefilter.
u Carefully clean the fuel prefilter and surrounding area.
u Disconnect the electrical connections on the water level sensor.
u Drain fuel: Open the breather screw 6 and the drain plug 5.
u Release the filter cartridge 3 with the strap wrench or similar tool and remove.
Fig. 374: Filter cartridge and water separator container
u Remove the water separator container 4 from the filter cartridge 3.

u Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
u Wet clean the water separator container and dry it with pressurized air.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Lightly lubricate the O-ring 9 on the water separator container.

u Screw the water separator container onto the new filter cartridge until the O-ring
is seated on the filter cartridge.
u Continue to tighten the water separator container by hand by 1/2 turn.
u Close the drain plug 5.
u Clean the filter head and make sure that the threaded adapter is seated tightly
in the filter head.
u Lubricate the seal ring 10 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
236 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
u Fill the new filter cartridge with clean fuel and screw it on until the seal ring is
seated on the filter head.
u Continue to tighten the filter cartridge by hand by 1/2 turn.
u Reestablish the electrical connections, close the breather screw 6 and open the
shut off valve for the fuel system.
u Bleed the fuel system.
Change the fuel fine filter

The fuel fine filter is located on the right hand side of the Diesel engine.
u Set the container under the fuel fine filter.
u Carefully clean the fuel fine filter and surrounding area.
Fig. 375: Fuel fine filter
u Release the filter cartridge 1 with the strap wrench or similar tool and remove.
u Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
u Clean the filter base and make sure that the threaded adapter is seated tightly
in the filter base.
u Lubricate the seal ring 2 on the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
NOTICE
Contamination of fuel system!
u Fill the new filter cartridge only via the outer small openings.
u Make sure that no contaminants get into the filter cartridge via the large
opening.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Fill the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.

u Screw on the filter cartridge until the seal ring is seated on the filter head.
u Continue to tighten the filter cartridge by hand by 1/2 turn.
u Open the shut off valve for the fuel system and bleed the fuel system. (For more
information see: 5.9.6 Bleed the fuel filter and the fuel system , page 242)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 237
Fuel system
5.9.4 Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank
Access to the drain valve is possible on the rear of the machine after removing the
cover plate
WARNING
Raised attachment and restricted space conditions!
u Support the working attachment properly or place it on the ground.
u Never work under the raised working attachment.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 377: Cover plate
u Remove the hex head screws 1 and remove the cover plate.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
238 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
Fig. 378: Drain valve of fuel tank
u Unscrew the cap on the drain valve on the underside of the fuel tank.
u Install the drain hose on the drain valve.
u Drain condensation and sediments into a suitable container until clean fuel
emerges.
u Remove the drain hose and install the cap on the drain valve and tighten.
u Install the cover plate with hex head screws.
5.9.5 Empty and clean the fuel tank
Empty the fuel tank

If the filter becomes dirty often, the fuel tank must be emptied and cleaned.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

u Remove the tank cover.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 239
Fuel system
WARNING
Raised attachment and restricted space conditions!
u Support the working attachment properly or place it on the ground.
u Never work under the raised working attachment.
u Access to the drain valve is possible on the rear of the machine after removing
the cover plate
Fig. 380: Cover plate
u Remove the hex head screws 1 and remove the cover plate.
Fig. 381: Drain valve - fuel tank
u Unscrew the cap on the drain valve on the underside of the Diesel fuel tank.
u Place a container with sufficient capacity under the drain valve.
u Drain fuel into a suitable container.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Install the cover plate with hex head screws.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
240 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
Fig. 382: Fuel tank - filler neck
u On the fuel tank - filler neck remove the retaining ring 1 .

u Remove the strainer 2, check it and replace it, if necessary.
u Check the fuel tank.
If the fuel tank is dirty:
u Clean the fuel tank.
u Reinstall the strainer and the retaining ring.
Clean the fuel tank

u Empty the fuel tank completely.
Fig. 383: Cleaning cover
u Raise the operator's platform.

Access to the cleaning cover is only possible if the cab is tilted.
u Remove the cleaning cover.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Check the O-ring on the cleaning cover and replace it, if needed.
u Clean the fuel tank.
u Install the cleaning cover with O - ring.
u Refill the fuel tank.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 241
Fuel system
5.9.6 Bleed the fuel filter and the fuel system

It is necessary to bleed the fuel filter after:
– Changing the fuel filter.
Bleeding the fuel system (low pressure system, high pressure system) is necessary
after:
– Emptying the fuel tank.
– Cleaning the fuel tank.
– Repairs on the fuel system.
q A container to catch the fuel is available.
q If necessary, have new injector lines ready.
NOTICE
Fuel lines are opened.
Danger of damage to the fuel system and the Diesel engine!
u To bleed the fuel filter, do not open any fuel injection lines or fittings.
u Open only the breather screw on the filter head of the fine filter.
Bleed the fuel filter
Fig. 384: Bleed the fuel filter

u Release the breather screw 1 on the filter head of the fine filter and back it out
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
by 2-3 threads.
u Actuate the hand pump 2.
If fuel without air bubbles emerges on the breather screw:
u Retighten the breather screw 1.
u Continue to actuate the hand pump until you can feel a stronger resistance.
If the Diesel engine does not start:
u Repeat the bleeding procedure.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
242 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
Bleed the fuel low pressure system
Fig. 385: Breather screw on the filter head of the fuel prefilter
u Release the breather screw 3 on the filter head of the fuel prefilter and back it
out by 2-3 threads.
Fig. 386: Breather screw on the filter head of the fuel fine filter
u Release the breather screw 1 on the filter head of the fuel fine filter and back it
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
out by 2-3 threads.


PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 243
Fuel system
Fig. 387: Breather screw on the crankcase
u Release the breather screw 4 on the crankcase and back it out by 2-3 threads.
Bleed the fuel high pressure system

Make sure that the fuel low pressure system has been bled.
Note
u Mark the injector lines every time you open them. After opening them three
times (marks), replace the injector lines.
Fig. 388: Marks on the injector line

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
244 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
Fig. 389: Injector lines of cylinder 1 and 4
u Loosen the injector lines of the cylinders 1 and 6 on the pressure pipe fitting
(nozzle side). (Make sure that it does not turn along!).
Fig. 390: Injector line of cylinder 1 and 4

u Retighten the injector lines on the nozzle side 1 6 with 27 Nm to 33 Nm.
Tightening torque Injector lines

Nozzle side 27 Nm to 33 Nm
Pump side 25 Nm to 40 Nm
Tab. 40
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
If the engine does not start:

u Repeat the bleeding procedure.
Software bleeding mode

From Software Version LinDiag 2.25d on, there is the possibility to start the engine
in the “bleeding mode”.
Make sure that the fuel low pressure system has been bled.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 245
Fuel system
Fig. 391: Scroll key
u Turn the ignition on.

u Hold the scroll key 53 down for at least 5 seconds.
w “BLEEDING” is shown blinking in the LC display.
In “bleeding mode”, the fuel injection time is extended until:
– the Diesel engine runs at low idle,
– a preset time is being exceeded.
Increased exhaust smoke will develop during the starting procedure in “bleeding
mode”.
Troubleshooting
The Diesel engine is not running?
u Wait for at least 1 minute and then start the Diesel engine again in “bleeding
mode”.
If the Diesel engine still does not start:
5.9.7 Drain the fuel water separator condensation
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 392: Fuel separator

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
246 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fuel system
u Open the breather screw 1.

u Open the drain valve 2 and drain condensation into a suitable container until
clean fuel emerges.
u Close the drain valve 2 and the breather screw 1 again.
5.9.8 Clean the fuel water separator

Fig. 393: Remove the cover
u Remove the screws 1 on the water separator.

u Place the cover 3 with the seal 4 down.
Fig. 394: Spring cartridge, strainer

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Remove the spring cartridge 7 .

u Remove the strainer 5 and clean or replace.
u Drain the fuel from the water separator.
u Fill the fuel water separator with clean fuel.
u Check the seal and reassemble the water separator in reverse order.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 247
Air filter system
5.10 Air filter system
5.10.1 Replacing the air filter
Ensure that following requirements are met:

q The machine is in the maintenance position.
Removing the main filter element

Replace the main filter element if:
– The Air filter contamination indicator light in the instrument panel lights up.
– According to the specified intervals in the “Maintenance and inspection
schedule.”
If the Air filter contamination indicator light continues to light up after maintenance
of the main air filter element:
u Also replace the safety element.
Fig. 395: Mounting clamps
u Open the mounting clamps 1 on the service cover and remove the cover.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 396: Main filter element
u Remove the main filter element 2.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
248 PR734-1481 / 13743
Air filter system
NOTICE
Clean the main filter element!
Main filter element is damaged.
u Do not clean the main filter element.
u Replace the main filter element 2.
Clean the filter housing
NOTICE
Dust is drawn in via the intake line!
This may damage the diesel engine.
u Never use compressed air to clean the filter housing.
u Ensure highest possible levels of cleanliness.
Fig. 397: Clean the filter housing
u Clean the filter housing with a clean cloth.
Replacing the safety element

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 398: Safety element
Replace the safety element 3 with every third change of the main filter element.
The safety element must not be cleaned!
Clean the filter housing before removing the safety element as described.
u Replace the safety element 3.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 249
Air filter system
NOTICE
Dust is drawn in via the intake line!
The diesel engine may be damaged as a result.
u Never operate the machine without an air filter.
u Install the safety element and the main filter element. Ensure correct seating.
Fig. 399: Close the mounting clamps
u Clean the service cover and fit it on to the filter housing in the correct position.
The mounting clamps cannot be closed without force until the service cover is
touching the filter housing all around the circumference
u Close the mounting clamps.
Troubleshooting
The filter cover cannot be locked.
u The filter cover is not installed the correct way round.
u The recess on the filter cover must match the notch on the filter.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
250 PR734-1481 / 13743
Hydraulic system
5.11 Hydraulic system
5.11.1 Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank and add oil
WARNING
The hydraulic system is under high pressure!
When releasing pressurized hydraulic lines and hoses, hydraulic oil can emerge
under high pressure and cause severe injuries.
u Do not remove any lines, hoses, connector pieces as long as the hydraulic
system is under pressure.
u With the Diesel engine turned off and the ignition turned on, actuate all func-
tions again to relieve the pressure in the hydraulic lines.
Check the hydraulic oil level

q The hydraulic oil is cold.
With the hydraulic cylinders retracted or warm hydraulic oil, the oil level may not
exceed the center of the upper sight gauge.
With the hydraulic cylinders extended or cold hydraulic oil, the oil level may not fall
below the center of the lower sight gauge.
The sight gauge is located on the outside of the hydraulic tank.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 251
Hydraulic system
Fig. 401: Sight gauges
u Check the oil level on the sight gauge 1.

If the oil level is below the nominal height:
u Add hydraulic oil.
Refill the hydraulic oil
Fig. 402: Hydraulic tank - breather screw
out by two turns.
Note
u Add hydraulic oil only via the return filter.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 403: Filter cover

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
252 PR734-1481 / 13743
Hydraulic system
u Loosen the screws 2 on the filter cover and remove.

u Remove the filter cover with the magnetic rod.
Fig. 404: Magnetic rod
u Check the magnetic rod 3 and clean it also, if necessary.

u Add hydraulic oil via the return filter to the oil level mark “MAX” on the hydraulic
tank.
Fig. 405: O-ring
u Check the O-ring 4 on the return filter cover and replace it, if necessary.
Note
u The sealing action of the return filter cover is not improved by tightening it more.
The return filter cover is sealed radially.
u Insert the filter cover with the magnetic rod and attach with screws.
u Close the breather screw on the hydraulic tank.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
5.11.2 Clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 253
Hydraulic system
Fig. 406: Breather screw
out by two turns.
u Loosen the screws 2 on the filter cover and slowly lift the filter cover with the
magnetic rod.
u Turn the return filter cover to open.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Check the magnetic rod 3 and clean it also, if necessary.

u Add hydraulic oil via the return filter to the oil level mark “MAX” on the hydraulic
tank.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
254 PR734-1481 / 13743
Hydraulic system
Fig. 409: O-ring
u Check the O-ring 4 on the return filter cover and replace it, if necessary.
Note
u Insert the filter cover with the magnetic rod and attach with screws.
u Close the breather screw on the hydraulic tank.
5.11.3 Change the return filter insert

If the return filter indicator light lights up when the hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature, then the return filter must be changed as specified in the Mainte-
nance and inspection schedule.
Use only Original Liebherr return filter insert.
It is not possible to clean the return filter insert.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 410: Breather screw
out by two turns.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 255
Hydraulic system
u Loosen the screws 2 on the filter cover and slowly lift the filter cover with the
magnetic rod.
u Remove the filter cover with spring and magnetic rod 3.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 413: Pressure plate
u Remove the pressure plate.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
256 PR734-1481 / 13743
Hydraulic system
Fig. 414: Return filter
u Remove the filter insert and dispose of it properly.

u Carefully insert a new filter insert.
u Clean the magnetic rod carefully.
u Check the O-ring on the return filter cover and replace it, if needed.
u Place the filter cover with magnetic rod on the housing.
u Tighten the screws on the filter cover.
Note
u Tighten the breather screw.
5.11.4 Change the replenishing circuit filter
The replenishing circuit filter is installed between the operator's cab and the bulk-
head.
q An original Liebherr oil filter cartridge is available.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 415: Filter - replenishing circuit
u Remove the filter cartridge 1 with a filter wrench.

u Clean the sealing surfaces on the filter console.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 257
Hydraulic system
u Lubricate the rubber seal ring on the new filter cartridge thinly with engine oil.
u Install a new filter cartridge on the filter bracket and tighten by hand.
u Install the cover.
5.11.5 Check the hydraulic system for function and leaks

q The operator's platform is raised.
Note
u See also section “Safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines” (For
more information see: 2.4.14 Safety notes for maintenance of hydraulic hoses
and hose lines, page 48) .
NOTICE
Do not check the machine for leaks with bare hands.
A fine stream of fluid under high pressure can cause severe injuries.
u Use protective gloves.
u Check the entire hydraulic system for leaks.

u Replace damaged hydraulic seals and hoses.
u Retighten loose hydraulic fittings.
5.11.6 Clean the oil cooler

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

To ensure proper cooling of the media to be cooled, clean the cooler, as necessary
In dust intensive applications, check the cooler daily and clean, if necessary.
Dirty cooler units lead to overheating.
Dust and other grime can be removed from the cooler fins with pressurized water
jet, steam or pressurized air.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
258 PR734-1481 / 13743
Hydraulic system
Use of pressurized air is recommended.
NOTICE
Careless treatment damages the cooler fins!
Danger of damage to the cooling system.
u Do not use hard objects or excessive water pressure for cleaning
Fig. 417: Oil cooler
u Clean the cooler unit with pressurized air, steam or water.

u Close the engine compartment doors.
5.11.7 Change the hydraulic oil

q The machine is at operating temperature.
q An appropriate container is available.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Relieve the tank pretension: Back the breather screw 1 out by two turns.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 259
Hydraulic system
Fig. 419: Oil drain valve on hydraulic tank
u Unscrew the cap on the drain valve on the underside of the hydraulic tank.
u Drain hydraulic oil into a suitable container.
Fig. 420: Add hydraulic oil
Note
u Add hydraulic oil only via the return filter.
u Loosen the screws on the filter cover and slowly lift the filter cover with the
magnetic rod.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 421: Oil level mark

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
260 PR734-1481 / 13743
Hydraulic system
u Add hydraulic oil to the oil level mark 2 “MAX”.

u Set the cover with pressure spring onto the housing and screw tight.
u Tighten the breather screw.
5.11.8 Drain water and sediments in the hydraulic tank

u Relieve tank pretension: Back the breather screw 1 on the hydraulic tank out by
two turns.
Fig. 423: Drain valve on the hydraulic tank
u Remove the cap on the drain valve on the underside of the hydraulic tank.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Drain condensation and sediments into a suitable container until clean hydraulic
oil emerges.
u Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank and add oil, if necessary.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 261
Splitterbox
5.12 Splitterbox
5.12.1 Check the oil level
The dipstick 2 and the oil filler tube 3 are in the engine compartment on the right
hand side of the engine.
Fig. 424: Oil filler neck, dipstick
The oil level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
u Pull out the dipstick 3, wipe it off and reinsert it.
u Pull the dipstick 3 out again and check the oil level.
u Remove the oil filler cap 2 from the oil filler tube 1 and add oil.
u Clean the oil filler cap 2.
u Set the oil filler cap 2 on the oil filler neck 1 and tighten.
5.12.2 Change the gear oil

q The engine compartment door is open.
q An appropriate container and drain hose with valve connection is available.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
262 PR734-1481 / 13743
Splitterbox
Fig. 425: Belly pan cover
u Remove the belly pan cover 1.
WARNING
Restricted space conditions and heavy weight of belly pans!
Danger of injury due to difficult removal.
u Use suitable lifting devices to remove the belly pans.
u In case of heavy material deposits in the belly pan area, the belly pans must be
removed and cleaned.
u Remove the oil filler cap 2 on the oil filler neck.
u Remove the cap on the drain valve on the gear housing.
Fig. 426: Oil drain valve
u Install the oil drain hose on the oil drain valve 1 and let the oil drain into a suit-
able container.
u Remove the oil drain hose and reinstall the cap on the oil drain valve.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Install the belly pan cover.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 263
Splitterbox
Fig. 427: Add oil
u Add fresh oil via the oil filler neck to the “MAX” mark on the dipstick.
u Clean the oil filler cap, set it on the oil filler neck and tighten.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
264 PR734-1481 / 13743
Electrical system
5.13 Electrical system
5.13.1 Check indicator lights and lighting

q The electrical system of the machine is turned on.
After ignition “ON”, the “bulb check” is carried out on the display unit.
All symbol fields light up for approx. 3 seconds.
u Turn the ignition on.
u Check the indicator lights.
u Check the function of all lights.
5.13.2 Check the batteries

The batteries are located in the battery compartment and are accessible after
opening the battery compartment door.
For proper function of the machine, it is important that the batteries are always in
immaculate condition.
The batteries with exception of the connector terminals are maintenance free.
Check the fluid level and the battery terminals

q The battery compartment door is open.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 428: Battery compartment

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 265
Electrical system
Fig. 429: Explosive gases
WARNING
Batteries emit explosive gases. Battery acid has strong caustic properties.
u Do not smoke and avoid open flames when handling batteries as well as during
battery maintenance and charging.
u When working on batteries, always wear gloves and safety glasses.
WARNING
Spark formation when using incorrect brushes!
When cleaning the terminals with incorrect brushes, there is a danger of spark
formation and subsequent gas explosion.
u Use the special terminal brush.
Fig. 430: Special terminal brush
u Clean the connector terminals and the connector clamps with a suitable
terminal brush.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Clean the surface of the battery with a clean cloth.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
266 PR734-1481 / 13743
Electrical system
Fig. 431: Battery mount
u Tighten the battery mounts.

u To prevent a loose connection, check the clamps on the terminals to ensure
they are seated properly on the studs and tighten them, if necessary.
u Coat the battery terminals and cable clamps with acid resistant grease (such as
Vaseline).
WARNING
Danger of explosion due to frozen batteries!
Do not charge batteries if they are frozen.
u Let the batteries warm up to approx. 16 °C before recharging.
u Observe the safety instructions for recharging batteries.
5.13.3 Change the light bulbs

Change the halogen light bulbs

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 432: Halogen light
u Unscrew the screws on the light frame.

u Remove the frame with the glass.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 267
Electrical system
Fig. 433: Bulb base
u Loosen the spring bar and pull the bulb base out.
u Remove the bulb from the base and replace it with a new one.
Note
u Do not touch the new halogen bulb with bare hands.
Change the bulb in the cab interior light
Fig. 434: Cab interior light and reading light
u Remove the glass.

u Remove the bulb from the base and replace it with a new one.
Note
u Do not touch the new bulb with bare hands.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Insert a new bulb.

u Insert the glass and push it up.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
268 PR734-1481 / 13743
5.14 Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system
5.14.1 Check the heater for function and leaks
Check for leaks

u Check all water circuit connections for leaks.
u Check all clamps and retighten, if necessary.
u Replace damaged hoses.
Fig. 435: Shut off valve
During repair work, close the shut off valve on the engine block.
u Close the shut off valves.
w The warm water supply to the heat exchanger is interrupted.
Check the function

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 436: Heater operation
u Turn the heater on and check the function.
Note
u Operate the heater to ensure that the coolant fluid contains sufficient antifreeze
fluid. See section “Check the antifreeze concentration in the coolant”.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 269
5.14.2 Clean and change the heater - fresh air filter

The access to the cab fresh air filter is on the front in the operator’s cab below the
compartment for the documentation.
Fig. 437: Snap lock
u Open the snap lock 1.
Fig. 438: Location of cab fresh air filter
u Fold the cover to the rear.

u Pull the filter out and remove it.
u Clean (blow out) the filter or change it.
u Insert the cleaned or new filter.
u Fold the cover up and lock it with the snap lock.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
5.14.3 Air conditioning system
Proper function of the entire air conditioning system is only ensured if the mainte-
nance tasks are carried out completely, diligently and properly by qualified
personnel.
Only trained air conditioning mechanics may access and repair the coolant circuit.
The air conditioning system must be serviced once a year, if possible before the
start of the summer season in a HVAC service station, otherwise any warranty
becomes void.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
270 PR734-1481 / 13743
Check the compressor mounting

u Open the right engine compartment door.
DANGER
Danger of injury due to turning engine parts!
Turning and moving engine parts, such as fan blades or V-belts pose a danger of
injuries!
u Open the engine compartment doors only when the Diesel engine is not
running.
Fig. 439: Open only if the engine is not running
Fig. 440: Compressor
u Check the compressor carrier and compressor supports for cracks and breaks,
check the screws for completeness and tight seating.
u Check the compressor for leaks.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Check the hose lines for leaks and any chafing.
Check and change the V-belt

(For more information see: 5.7.5 Check and change the V-belt , page 218)

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 271
Fig. 441: Air conditioning system V-belt
Check the refrigerant quantity and moisture content
Fig. 442: Dryer
Note
u The moisture content in the system must be checked regularly, otherwise the air
conditioning system can be destroyed due to acidification.
The dryer is installed on the rear on the operator's cab roof in the evaporator unit
and can be checked through the protective grill.
CAUTION
Danger of injury due to fall from the machine.
u A suitable access aid is required for inspection.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
In the sight gauge are two indicator pearls.

A white floater ball and an orange ball, the moisture indicator.
The refrigerant must flow without air bubbles through the sight gauge of the fluid
reservoir (dryer) and lift the white floater ball.
After the system is turned off, the fluid level must fall back into the reservoir. This
ensures that the system is not overfilled.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
272 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 443: Indicator pearls
u Check the refrigerant quantity: The refrigerant must flow without air bubbles
through the sight gauge when the Diesel engine is running and lift the white
floater ball.
u Check the color of the indicator pearl.
If the orange ball in the sight gauge turns colorless:
u Replace the dryer.
Change the recirculating air filter

The recirculating air filter is located behind the operator’s seat, on the floor of the
operator’s platform.
The air in the cab is filtered through the recirculating air filter.
Fig. 444: Change the recirculating air filter
u Move the operator's seat all the way forward.

u Remove the knurled thumb screws 1 on the filter housing.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Remove the protective grill and remove the recirculating air filter 2.
u Reinstall a new recirculating air filter and attach the protective grill with the
knurled screws.
5.14.4 Check and clean the drain valves

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 273
Check and clean the drain valve on the recirculated air

filter
Condensation can form during the operation of the air conditioning system. This
condensation can be discharged via the drain valves on the underside of the oper-
ator's platform.
The access to the drain valves is provided via the intake channel of the recirculated
air filter or via the fresh air filter.
Fig. 445: Recirculated air filter
The recirculated air filter is located behind the operator’s seat, on the floor of the
operator’s platform.
Fig. 446: Recirculated air filter
u Move the operator's seat all the way forward.

u Remove the knurled thumb screws 1 on the filter housing.
u Remove the protective grill and remove the recirculated air filter 2.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
274 PR734-1481 / 13743
Fig. 447: Bore for water drainage
The drain valve can be cleaned via the intake channel on the operator’s platform.
The bore for the water discharge is below the insulated air conditioner hose.
Fig. 448: Drain valve on the recirculated air filter
u Check the drain valve and clean it, if necessary.
Note
u If necessary use a short piece of wire or a flexible shaft for cleaning.
Check and clean the drain valve on the fresh air filter
The access to the cab fresh air filter is on the front in the operator’s cab below the
compartment for the documentation.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 275
Fig. 449: Snap lock
u Open the snap lock 1.
Fig. 450: Drain valve on the fresh air filter
u Fold the cover back.

u Check the drain valve and clean it, if necessary.
Note
u If necessary use a short piece of wire or a flexible shaft for cleaning.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
276 PR734-1481 / 13743
Drive gear
5.15 Drive gear
5.15.1 Check condition of travel gear
u Check the travel gear for leaks.
NOTICE
Wire or other objects are wound around the travel gear!
Any objects wound around the travel gear can be pushed into the gaps and subse-
quently damage the seals.
u Remove any wound up objects.
u Check the travel gear housing and remove any wound up objects, if present.
5.15.2 Check the oil level

q The machine is parked in such a way that the oil drain plug 1 is positioned on
the lowest gear point.
q A torque wrench is available.
Fig. 451: Travel gear
The oil level must be at the height of the oil filler port.
u Clean the area of the oil filler plug 2.
u Remove both oil filler plugs 2 with a socket wrench.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

u Add oil via the oil filler port 2.
For oil quality, refer to section “Lubricants and service fluids”.
u Clean the oil filler plug 2 and reinsert.
Note
u Observe the tightening torque of 120 Nm.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 277
Drive gear
5.15.3 Change the oil

q The machine is parked in such a way that the oil drain plug 1 is positioned on
the lowest gear point.
q An appropriate container is available.
u Clean the area of the oil filler and oil drain plug.
u Place a container under the oil drain plug 1.
u Remove both oil filler plugs 2.
u Remove the oil drain plug 1.
u Let the oil flow into the container.
u Check the oil for mechanical contamination.
u Clean the oil drain plug 1 and reinstall.
Note
To be able to drain the gear oil completely from the gear, the oil on the inside of the
gear must also be drained form the gear housing.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
278 PR734-1481 / 13743
Drive gear
Fig. 453: Travel gear inside
u Clean the areas around the drain plugs 3.

u Place a container under the oil drain plug 3.
u Remove the oil drain plug 3.
u Let the oil flow into the container.
u Check the oil for mechanical contamination.
u Clean the oil drain plug 3 and reinstall.
Note
u Observe the tightening torques of 120 Nm.
u Add oil via the oil filler plug 2 of the gear until the lower edge of the filler port.
u Clean the oil filler plug 2 and reinsert.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Note
5.15.4 Travel gear - Duo cone (slipring) seal area

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 279
Drive gear
Monitor the oil level in the duo cone (slipring) area
Fig. 455: Indicator lights Travel gear duo cone (slipring) area
If the oil level is too low, the indicator lights Travel gear duo cone (slipring) area 45
or 46 light up in the instrument panel.
If an indicator light lights up:
u Park the machine.
u Check the affected travel gear externally for leaks.
Note
u For continued operation in the meantime, bring the oil level to normal level.
Check the oil level in the duo cone (slipring) area

The oil reservoir 1 is installed on the right hand side in the oil cooler reservoir.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 456: Duo cone (slipring) area oil compartment
The oil must be visible in the center of the sight gauge.

u Check the oil level on the sight gauge 2.
u Add oil.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
280 PR734-1481 / 13743
Drive gear
Change the oil in the duo cone (slipring) area

q Two appropriate containers are on hand.
q The correct oil quality and amount according to the data in chapter “Lubricants
and Service fluids” is available.
The oil reservoir 1 is installed on the right hand side in the oil cooler reservoir.
u Remove the cover 3 on the oil reservoir.

u Set the container under the drain plug on the travel gear.
Fig. 458: Duo cone (slipring) area drain plug
u Remove the drain plug 1 on the bottom on the travel gear.

u Repeat the drain procedure on the second travel gear.
u Let the oil drain into the container and dispose of it properly.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Flush the duo cone (slipring) area

Make sure that the hydraulic oil is at operating temperature.
Before refilling, always flush the duo cone (slipring) area adequately.
Any deposits will be removed from the duo cone (slipring) area by the flushing
procedure.
The flushing and fill connections are located in the battery compartment.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 281
Drive gear
The required equipment to flush the duo cone (slipring) area is available from your
Liebherr dealer.
Fig. 459: Duo cone (slipring) area drain plug
u Check if both containers are under the drain plugs on the duo cone (slipring)
area and if the drain plugs are open.
Fig. 460: Battery compartment door
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 461: Flushing and fill connections

1 Flushing connection right 4 Fill connection left
See next page for continuation of the image legend

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
282 PR734-1481 / 13743
Drive gear
2 Flushing connection left 5 Replenishing pressure connection

(SP)
3 Fill connection right
Duo cone (slipring area), right
u Remove the cap on connection 5.
u Remove the fitting and the union nut from connection 1.
Fig. 462: Connect the flushing line
u Connect the flushing line.
Fig. 463: Pressure relief valve of flushing line

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The flushing line is equipped with a pressure relief valve.

If the drain of the duo cone (slipring) area is plugged up, the pressure relief valve is
actuated.
If the pressure relief valve is actuated:
u Clean the drain bore and continue the flushing procedure.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 283
Drive gear
u Press the emergency off button in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Danger of accidents if Diesel engine is running!
u During the oil change, leave the emergency off button in actuated position.
u During the oil change, leave the safety lever in the up position.
u Start the Diesel engine at low idle rpm.

u Let the Diesel engine run until only clean oil emerges from the drain plugs.
Duo cone (slipring) area, left
Fig. 465: Connect the flushing line

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Remove the flushing line from the right connection 1 and close the connection 1
with fitting and union nut.
u On connection 2, remove the fitting and union nut and connect the flushing line.
Note
u Carry out the flushing procedure at the left duo cone (slipring) area also.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
284 PR734-1481 / 13743
Drive gear
Fig. 466: Duo cone (slipring) area drain plugs
u After the flushing procedure, install the left and right drain plugs 1.
Note
Fill the duo cone (slipring) area with oil

Drain the oil first as described previously and flush the duo cone (slipring) area.
(For more information see: Flush the duo cone (slipring) area , page 281)
u Install and tighten the drain plugs on the left and right hand side.
Note
Duo cone (slipring) area, left

u Remove the union nut and fitting from the fill connection 4.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 467: Flushing line on left fill connection
u Connect the flushing line on the left fill connections 4.

u Start the Diesel engine at low idle rpm.
w The duo cone (slipring) area if filled with oil via the flushing line.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 285
Drive gear
u Monitor the container interior via the fill opening.

If the oil level increases visibly:
u Then wait for a short time until the oil level drops noticeably.
Duo cone (slipring area), right
u Remove the union nut and fitting from the fill connection 3.
Fig. 469: Flushing line on right fill connection
u Remove the flushing line from fill connection 4 and connect on fill connection 3.
u Close the fill connection 4 off with fitting and union nut.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
286 PR734-1481 / 13743
Drive gear
u Start the Diesel engine again at low idle rpm and let it run until the reservoir is
filled to the lower edge of the filler port.
w The duo cone (slipring) area oil reservoir is overfilled.
u Remove the flushing line and close the connection 3 off with fitting and union
nut.
u Install the cap on connection 5.
u Close the battery compartment door.
u Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank and add oil, if necessary.
u Operate the machine for a short period and recheck the oil level.
u Add oil to the duo cone (slipring) reservoir, if necessary.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 287
Track components
5.16 Track components
5.16.1 Checking the nuts and bolts of the travel gear compo-
nents are firmly seated
Ensure that following requirements are met:

Check the tightening torque

u Check the fastening bolts on the track pads and sprocket segments visually for
looseness.
Fig. 471: Tightening torque
u Check the tightening torques.
Tightening torques for track pad bolts (re-check)
Made by BERCO
Size Tightening torque
3/4” - 16 UNF 630 +/- 20 Nm
7/8” - 14 UNF 850 +/- 10 Nm
M24 x 1.5 1020 +/- 30 Nm
M27 x 2 1913 +/- 49 Nm
1” - 14 UNF 1400 +/- 30 Nm
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Tab. 41: Tightening torque for BERCO items
Made by INTERTRAC
3/4” - 16 UNF 640 +/- 30 Nm
Tab. 42: Tightening torque for Intertrac items
u Loosen loose bolts and the surrounding bolts and retighten.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
288 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
Tightening torques for track pad bolts
Made by BERCO
3/4” - 16 UNF 270 +/- 30 Nm + 120° 15)
7/8” - 14 UNF 350 +/- 35 Nm + 120° 15)
M24 x 1.5 400 +/- 35 Nm + 120° 15)
M27 x 2 785 Nm + 120° 15)
1” - 14 UNF 550 +/- 40 Nm + 120° 15)
Tab. 43: Tightening torque for BERCO items
Made by INTERTRAC
3/4” - 16 UNF 320 +/- 15 Nm + 120° 15)
Tab. 44: Tightening torque for Intertrac items
u Loosen loose bolts and the surrounding bolts, and retighten.
Tightening torques for sprocket segment bolts

5/8” - 18 UNF 175 +/- 40 Nm + 120°
3/4” - 16 UNF 300 +/- 55 Nm + 120°
7/8” - 14 UNF 340 +/- 70 Nm + 120°
1” - 14 UNF 340 +/- 70 Nm + 120°
Tab. 45: Tightening torque for sprocket segment bolts
u Check the tightening torque.
5.16.2 Check and adjust the idler guides

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
15) Tighten the master links with 180° instead of 120°.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 289
Track components
Clearance in the idler guides
Fig. 472: Idler guide
The normal clearance between the track roller frame and the side guide is 1 mm to
2 mm, the height clearance of rubber springs is approx. 3 mm. The clearance is
increased due to wear of the wear bars, guide rails and guide plates. When the
maximum permissible values are reached, the respective clearance must be read-
justed or the worn parts must be replaced.
Fig. 473: Side and height clearance

1 Side clearance 2 Height clearance
New and repair dimension

Side clearance 1 mm to 2 mm
Height clearance 3 mm
Tab. 46
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Maximum permissible play

Side clearance 5 mm
Height clearance 6 mm
Tab. 47
Check and adjust the side clearance

u Move the inner guide plate until it touches the track roller frame. Deflect the
travel joystick in direction of driving in curves.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
290 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
Fig. 474: Check the side clearance

1 Side clearance
u Measure the existing clearance between the track roller frame and the guide
plate.
Fig. 475: Correct the side clearance
The difference between the number of shims on the inside and the outside may
never be more than 1 shim.
If the clearance is too large:
u Remove shims on the inside and / or outside.
If no more shims exist:
u Replace the guide plates.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 291
Track components
Check and adjust the height clearance
Fig. 476: Lift the idler
u Lift the idler: Drive on a wooden block (maximum height 200 mm).
w The claws touch on the guide rails.
Fig. 477: Check the height clearance
u Measure the height clearance between the wear bars and the bearing bracket.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 478: Correct the height clearance
If the maximum permissible clearance is being exceeded:

u Replace the bars 1 and 2 in pairs.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
292 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
Fig. 479: Guide rails
If the guide rails 3 are worn:

u Replace the guide rails 3 in pairs.
5.16.3 Check and adjust the chain tension
DANGER
Danger to life when removing the chain tensioner spring!
The chain tensioner spring is pretensioned, even though the chain tension is
relieved.
During removal or repair, the chain tensioner spring can jump out and cause very
severe injuries.
u The chain tensioner spring may only be replaced or repaired by authorized and
trained expert personnel.
Fig. 480: Chain tension

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Check the chain tension regularly and retension the chain, if necessary, otherwise
the track wear increases. The conditions must be identical to the working condi-
tions!
An incorrectly tensioned spring results in high chain wear.
Since deposits on track and chains are less in rocky ground than in cohesive
ground, the adjustment of the chains must be made according to the application
conditions.
Before checking the chain tension, do not remove any material, which has built up
during work on the track components.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 293
Track components
The conditions must be identical to the working conditions!
NOTICE
Strong wear on tooth segments!
If the tooth segments on the travel gear are worn too much, then the chain can
jump over.
u Check the tooth segments regularly for wear.
Check the chain tension

q A ruler is available.
u Relieve the chains: Move the machine forward and backward.
u Place a ruler in the area between the idler and the carrier roller.
Fig. 481: Check the chain tension
u Measure the distance between the lower edge of the measuring stick and the
grouser.
The chain under working conditions should have a sag of 30 mm to 40 mm
between carrier roller and idler or between carrier roller and sprocket.
NOTICE
The chain is tensioned too much!
Excessively tensioned chains increase dirt build up and wear.
u Adjust the chain tension to the specified sag dimension by taking the working
conditions into account.
NOTICE
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
The chain is not tensioned enough!

Chains which are insufficiently tensioned can jump over and as a result damage
the drive train.
u Adjust the chain tension to the specified sag dimension by taking the working
conditions into account.
If the distance is larger or smaller:

u Adjust the chain tension as described below.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
294 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
Tension the chain

q The manual grease pump is on hand.
u Clean the cover and the surrounding areas on the track roller frame.
Fig. 482: Cover on the track roller frame
u Remove the hex head screws 1 and remove the cover 2.
Fig. 483: Manual grease gun
u Connect the manual grease gun to the fitting on the chain tension cylinder.
u Press in grease until the specified sag dimension (30 mm to 40 mm) is
obtained.
u Attach the cover with hex head screws 1.
Release the chain tension

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

u Clean the cover and the surrounding areas on the track roller frame.
u Remove the hex head screws 1 and remove the cover 2.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 295
Track components
Fig. 484: Danger of injury
WARNING
Danger of injury when releasing the grease fitting on the chain tension cylinder!
When releasing the grease fitting, the chain can suddenly sag and crush body
parts. Splashing grease can cause severe injuries.
u Wear protective gloves and safety glasses and keep the head away from the
track roller frame.
Fig. 485: Grease fitting
u Carefully back out the grease fitting 1 by a few threads.

w Grease emerges from the ring groove of the fitting.
When the specified chain tension is reached:
u Tighten the grease fitting 1.
u Move the machine forward and backward.
u Check the chain tension and correct, if necessary.
u Attach the cover 2 with hex head screws 1.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
5.16.4 Change the chain

q Tools for changing the chain are on hand.
Remove and install a chain with a split master link

u Park the machine on level and solid ground.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
296 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
u Release the chain tension. (For more information see: 5.16.3 Check and adjust
the chain tension , page 293)
Do not close the grease fitting 1 to allow the grease, which is being pushed back to
emerge on the ring nut.
u Slowly move the machine with the idler against a wooden block until the idler is
pushed back completely.
Fig. 487: Master link
u Set the master link on the center of the sprocket: Move the machine forward or
backward.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 488: Place wooden blocks
u Secure the chain to prevent it from rolling off: Place a wooden block in front of
the idler and behind the sprocket.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 297
Track components
u Spray the lock on the master link with penetrating oil and support the infiltration
of the penetrating oil by hitting the master link lightly with a hammer.
Fig. 489: Master link manufacturers
u Remove the track pad bolts on the end pad.

u Remove the end pad.
u Release and divide the master link by hitting it lightly with a hammer.
u Remove the wooden block on the front.
u Place the chain on the ground by carefully driving forward.
Chains with split master links can be easily installed on the sprocket or on the idler.
u Drive the machine backward on the placed down chain.
u Clean the lock and the bore holes of the new chain to remove any paint, conser-
vation substances or other foreign material and grease lightly.
u Check the bore holes: Screws must be able to be installed by hand.
Fig. 490: Travel direction forwards

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
u Place the chain true to side on the ground behind the old chain (Travel direc-
tion forward 1).
u Connect the new chain with the old chain with a wire.
u Align the chain to the track and drive the machine carefully to the end of the
new chain.
u Release the new chain from the old chain and attach it on the sprocket with the
wire.
u Carefully drive the machine forward until the chain is positioned on top on the
sprocket.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
298 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
u Remove the wire on the chain and on the sprocket.

u Bring the chain over the carrier roller and the idler by driving it forward carefully.
u Drive the machine forward until the master link is on the center of the idler.
Fig. 491: Insert a wooden block
u Secure the chain in front of the idler and behind the sprocket with a wooden
block.
u Connect the master links, place the track pad and tighten the bolts with the
specified tightening torque.
u Tension the chain.
Remove and install a sealed chain

u Park the machine on level and solid ground.
u Release the chain tension.

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Do not close the grease fitting 1 to allow the grease, which is being pushed back to
emerge on the ring nut.
u Slowly move the machine with the idler against a wooden block until the idler is
pushed back completely.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 299
Track components
Fig. 493: Chain link pin
The chain link pins can be recognized on the tapered pin edge or on the counter-
sink.
u Set the chain link pins to 1/3 the height of the sprocket: Move the machine
forward or backward.
u Secure the chain to prevent it from rolling off: Place a wooden block in front of
the idler and behind the sprocket.
WARNING
When removing or inserting tempered link pins with a sledge hammer, metal
splinters can split off.
Danger of injury due to splitting off material on the chain link pin or the tool!
u Wear safety glasses and protective clothing.
u Use a hydraulic press.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Press the knurled pins out from the inside to the outside and press them in from
the outside to the inside. Knurled edge on the outside.
When knocking the link pins out, hold the opposite side of the chain band to
counter.
u Press the link pins out or knock them out with a suitable tool.
u Remove any spacer rings which were inserted and lay them aside.
u Place the chain on the ground by carefully driving forward.
u Drive the machine backward on the placed down chain.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
300 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
Fig. 495: Travel direction forwards
u Place the chain true to side on the ground behind the old chain (Travel direc-
tion forward 1).
u Connect the new chain with the old chain with the link pin.
u Align the chain to the track and drive the machine carefully to the end of the
new chain.
u Release the new chain from the old chain and attach it on the sprocket with the
wire.
u Carefully drive the machine forward until the chain is positioned on top on the
sprocket.
u Remove the wire on the chain and on the sprocket.
u Bring the chain over the carrier roller and the idler by driving it forward carefully.
u Drive the machine forward until two track pads are still in front of the idler.
u Secure the chain in front of the idler and behind the sprocket with a wooden
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
block.
u Reinsert the spacer rings, which were removed when the chain was removed.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 301
Track components
Fig. 497: Chain link pin
When knocking the link pins in, hold the opposite side of the chain band to counter.
u Press or knock the link pins in from the outside to the inside.
u Tension the chain.
5.16.5 Check the oil quantity in the axle bearing
The left and right axle bearings are filled with oil. Check the oil quantity according
to the data in the maintenance and inspection schedule.
The oil in the axle bearings does not need to be changed. The oil is only used as
corrosion protection.
q The correct oil quality according to the data in chapter “Lubricants and Service
items” is available.
Check the oil level

u Clean the area of the oil level control plug.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 498: Oil level control plug
u Remove the oil level control plug 1.

The oil level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
u Add oil via the bore.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
302 PR734-1481 / 13743
Track components
u Reinstall the oil level control plug 1.

u Check the oil level on the opposite axle bearing, as described.
Drain the oil

u Clean the area of the oil level control plug.
u Remove the oil level control plug 1.
u Place a suitable container under the drain plug.
Fig. 499: Drain plug
u Remove the drain plug 2 on the axle bearing cover.

w Oil drains off.
u Check the seal on the drain plug and replace it, if necessary.
u Insert the drain plug 2.
u Fill the axle bearing with oil.
u Reinstall the oil level control plug 1.
5.16.6 Lubricate the equalizer bar bearing
The center equalizer bar bearing is equipped with a grease fitting and must be
greased as specified in the data in the Maintenance and Inspection schedule.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Fig. 500: Lube point - equalizer bar bearing
u Open the right engine compartment door.

u Grease the lube point 1 with the manual grease pump.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 303
Working attachment
5.17 Working attachment
5.17.1 Check the cutting edges, end bits and ripper tips for
wear
To avoid damage on the blade or the tooth adapters of the ripper, replace the
cutting edges as well as the teeth before the wear limit is reached.
Check the cutting edges and end bits for wear

u Check the cutting edges and end bits of the blade equipment for wear.
Check the ripper teeth for wear

u Check the ripper teeth for wear.
5.17.2 Check the center position and mounting
Check the blade center position

The distance between the push frame and the track roller frame must be the same
on the left and right.
u Measure the distance between the track roller frame and the push frame.
5.17.3 Check the mounting screws and bolt retainers of the

attachment for tight seating
Make sure that a torque wrench is on hand.

u Check the mounting screws and bolt retainers of the attachment for tight
seating.
u Release loose screws and tighten them with the specified tightening torque.
5.17.4 Ripper Remove and install the tooth tips
Removal
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
WARNING
Danger of injury due to falling attachment!
Never work under the raised attachment.
u Lower the ripper to the ground or support it properly.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
304 PR734-1481 / 13743
Working attachment
WARNING
Danger of injury due to material splitting off when knocking out the pin.
u Wear protective goggles and protective gloves.
u There may be no persons within the danger zone.
Fig. 501: Support the ripper
Fig. 502: Ripper tooth
u Knock out the retaining pin with a hammer and punch.

u Remove the tooth.
u Clean the tooth retainer and retaining pin.
u Install a new tooth tip.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 305
Cleaning the machine
5.18 Cleaning the machine
5.18.1 Wet cleaning the machine
Notes for cleaning
NOTICE
During high pressure cleaning, electrical components, such as electronic boxes,
refueling pump, test value sensor and electrical parts in the cab can be damaged!
u Do not expose the electrical components to a direct jet of water or steam.
NOTICE
During high pressure cleaning [more than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar)] freshly painted
surfaces can be damaged!
u After delivery of the machine, the paint should air dry for at least 30 days before
cleaning the machine or parts of the machine with high pressure cleaners!
u Use only low pressure cleaners to wash the machine until the 30 days are up!
Clean the machine
Fig. 503: Wet cleaning
u Wet clean the machine.

u All lube points on the machine must be greased again.
Clean the Diesel engine

LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
NOTICE
Danger of Diesel engine damage with associated electrical components due to
moisture infiltration!
u Do not expose electrical components, such as starter, alternator, test value
sensor and oil pressure switches to a direct jet of water or steam.
u Clean the engine carefully.

u After cleaning, warm the engine up to dry it.

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
306 PR734-1481 / 13743
Cleaning the machine
Clean the track components
NOTICE
Danger of damaging oil lubricated track components due to destruction of seal!
When cleaning the track with high pressure cleaners, the sealing plugs of the track
components can be pushed into the oil chambers.
u Do not spray directly on the sealing plugs with the high pressure cleaner. Keep
a distance of approx. 40 cm.
Fig. 504: Sealing plug
u Clean the track.

u After cleaning, check the seals of the track components.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 307
Preservation tasks
5.19 Preservation tasks
5.19.1 Protect the piston rods

u Use corrosion inhibitor grease according to the “Lubrication and service item
specification”.
u Operate the machine at least every 14 days according to the Operating instruc-
tions until the Diesel engine and the hydraulic system has reached operating
temperature.
u Actuate all travel and working hydraulic functions.
u Extend and retract the piston rods several times over their full length.
u Check the oil level, lube points and the electrical system.
u Park the machine in such a way that all piston rods are retracted in the cylinders
as far as possible.
u Cover the exposed piston rods thickly with corrosion inhibitor grease according
to the “Lubrication and service item specification”.
When a conserved machine is moved for loading or transport, then the conserva-
tion protection on the piston rods of the cylinders will be removed by the scraper
ring.
If the machine is being transported:
u Check the conservation of the piston rods again after loading.
5.19.2 Taking the machine out of service

u If the machine is expected to be taken out of service for an extended period of
time, make sure to contact Liebherr Service for advice.
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
308 PR734-1481 / 13743
Index 7
70 Button Towing mode 66
71 Indicator light Fuel water separator 61
A
Accident prevention sign 30
Activate the parking brake 110, 112
Activating blade release 118
3 Actuating the tilt cylinder 119
Add coolant 224, 232
30 LC display 56
Add Diesel fuel 90
31 Warning light Operator's cab 57
Add Diesel fuel with the refueling pump 91
33 Coolant temperature display 58
Additional designations 26
34 Fuel display 58
Additional rules and guidelines 26
35 Operating hour meter 58
Adjustable speeds 105
Adjust the backrest 72, 74
4 Adjust the ergonomic seat position individually 71, 73
Adjust the lumbar support 75
40 Indicator light Battery charge 58
Adjust the mirror 90
41 Indicator light Pump replenishing pressure 58
Adjust the operator's seat horizontally 71, 73
42 Indicator light Fan control 59
Adjust the seat height 71, 74
43 Indicator light Electronic 59
Adjust the seat surface incline 74
44 Indicator light Hydraulic oil temperature 59
Adjust the seat suspension 72, 75
45 Indicator light Travel gear - duo cone (slipring)
Adjust the throttle control 97
area, left 60
After driving on the loading surface 144
46 Indicator light Travel gear - duo cone (slipring)
After the towing procedure 156
area, right 60
Air conditioning system 80, 270
47 Indicator light Preheat system 60
Air conditioning system full power 82
48 Indicator light Parking brake 60
Air filter system 173, 248
49 Indicator light Air filter contamination 60
Align the machine to the attachment 141
Approved antifreeze fluids with corrosion inhibitor
5 185
Approved corrosion inhibitors without antifreeze
50 Indicator light Return filter 61
protection 185
52 Horn button 62
Approved premixed antifreeze fluids with corrosion
53 Scroll key 62
inhibitor 185
54 Indicator light Diesel engine problem 61
Armrests 78
55 Switch Windshield wiper, front 63
56 Switch Windshield wiper, rear 63
57 Switch Windshield wiper, left door 63
58 Switch Windshield wiper, right door 63
B
Back up warning device 86
59 Switch Windshield wiper - intermittent / washer
Battery sign 32
system 63
Biodegradable hydraulic oils 188
Blade release 118
6 Bleed the fuel filter 242
Bleed the fuel filter and the fuel system 242
60 Starter switch 64
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Bleed the fuel high pressure system 244

61 Emergency off button 64
Bleed the fuel low pressure system 243
62 Switch Floodlight Hoist cylinder 65
Brake with the speed reduction pedal 109
62 Warning buzzer 61
Brake with the travel joystick 109
63 Knob Windshield wiper, intermittent control 65
Braking 109
64 Switch Lights, front 65
Bring engine to operating temperature 102
65 Switch Lights, rear 65
Bring the machine into maintenance position 200
66 Air conditioning master switch 65
Bring the machine into operating position 88
67 Operation of heater / air conditioner 66
68 Radio 66

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 309
Index Operator's manual
C Check the function 269

Check the heater for function and leaks 269
Carry out the starting procedure 98 Check the hydraulic oil level 251
Change fuel filter cartridges 235 Check the hydraulic system for function and leaks
Change the bulb in the cab interior light 268 258
Change the chain 296 Check the indictor lights 98
Change the coolant 231 Check the lighting systems 89
Change the engine oil 215 Check the mixing ratio with the refractometer 229
Change the fuel fine filter 237 Check the mounting screws and bolt retainers of the
Change the fuses 165 attachment for tight seating 304
Change the gear oil 262 Check the oil level 262, 277, 302
Change the halogen light bulbs 267 Check the oil level in the duo cone (slipring) area
Change the hydraulic oil 259 280
Change the light bulbs 267 Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank and add oil
Change the lube oil filter 217 251
Change the oil 278 Check the oil quantity in the axle bearing 302
Change the oil in the duo cone (slipring) area 281 Check the position of the safety lever 96
Change the oil separator filter insert 221 Check the position of the travel joystick 97
Change the recirculating air filter 273 Check the refrigerant quantity and moisture
Change the replenishing circuit filter 257 content 272
Change the return filter insert 255 Check the ripper teeth for wear 304
Change the V-belt 219 Check the supply and exhaust lines for mounting and
Change the wiper blade 213 leaks 220
Check and adjust the chain tension 293 Check the tightening torque 288
Check and adjust the height clearance 292 Check the V-belt arrangement 218
Check and adjust the idler guides 289 Check the vibration damper 223
Check and adjust the side clearance 290 Check the windshield wiper 213
Check and change the V-belt 218, 271 Clean and change the heater - fresh air filter 270
Check and clean the drain valve on the fresh air filter Cleaning the machine 306
275 Clean the Diesel engine 306
Check and clean the drain valve on the recirculated Clean the filter housing 249
air filter 274 Clean the fuel tank 241
Check and clean the drain valves 273 Clean the fuel water separator 247
Check condition of travel gear 277 Clean the machine 306
Check for leaks 269 Clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank 253
Check indicator lights and lighting 265 Clean the oil cooler 258
Checking the nuts and bolts of the travel gear Clean the track components 307
components are firmly seated 288 Clearance in the idler guides 290
Check the antifreeze concentration 227 Close the service doors, flaps and hoods 89
Check the antifreeze concentration in the coolant 226 Compartment for documentation 85
Check the batteries 265 Connect the auxiliary battery 157
Check the blade center position 304 Continue operation 115
Check the center position and mounting 304 Control, operation 53
Check the chain tension 294 Control elements on the operator's platform , 6256
Check the compressor mounting 271 Coolant for Diesel engines 183
Check the coolant level 224 Coolant mixing ratio 184
Check the cooler lock 226 Cooling system 173, 198, 224
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Check the cooling system 226 Correct the antifreeze concentration 227
Check the cutting edges, end bits and ripper tips for Correct the windshield wiper position 213
wear 304 Cutting angle position 120
Check the cutting edges and end bits for wear 304
Check the Diesel engine arrangement for leaks and
condition 219 D
Check the electrical system of the Diesel engine 222 Designation of warning notes 25
Check the engine mount, oil pan and engine Design overview 15, 134
brackets 223 Destined use 26
Check the engine oil level 214 Diesel engine 160, 172, 197, 214, 218
Check the fluid level and the battery terminals 265

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
310 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Index
Diesel engine: Check all sensors and cable Fuse chart in central electric housing 167
connections for tight seating and condition 222 Fuse chart in the roof console 169
Diesel engine: Check the arrangement and belly pans Fuse in radio 169
for contamination and clean 217 Fuses in central electric housing 165
Diesel engine arrangement and belly pans 218
Diesel fuels 180
Diesel fuels at low temperatures (winter G
operation) 181 General data 180
Disconnect the auxiliary battery 158 General recommendations 183
Display Hydraulic oil temperature 66 General safety instructions 40
Door latch 70 Grading 125
Door lock 69 Grease and other lubricants 193
Downhill travel sign 30 Grease for automatic grease central lubrication
Dozer blade - Emergency lowering 118 system 195
Dozing in tracks 126
Dozing with full blade 125
Drain the coolant 231 H
Drain the fuel filter condensation 234 Hand, arm and whole body vibration emission 17
Drain the fuel water separator condensation 246 Hand - arm vibrations 17
Drain the oil 303 Heater, ventilation 78
Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank 238 Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system 174, 269
Drain water and sediments in the hydraulic tank 261 Heating system 164
Drive gear 175, 277 High sulfur content in Diesel fuel 180
Drive onto the loading surface 142 Hydraulic oil 186
Driving backward 107 Hydraulic oil level indicator 67
Driving forward 107 Hydraulic system 163, 173, 196, 251
Driving straight ahead 107
I
E Increasing blade volume 125
Electrical system 163, 174, 265 Index 309
Electrical window wiper and window washer system Information for vibration emission 17
84 Inside mirror 83
Embedding removed material 130 Install and remove the attachment 132
Emergency exit 68 Install and remove the push frame with the straight
Emergency operations 149 blade 134
Empty and clean the fuel tank 239 Installation guidelines for installation and removal of
Empty the fuel tank 239 attachment parts 132
Engine oil as hydraulic oil 187 Install the bearing shells of the attachment 132
Engine standstill sign 28 Install the center bearing 136
Entry 68 Install the hoist cylinder 138
Equipment and attachment parts 50 Install the left half of the push frame 135
Install the right half of the push frame 135
Install the straight blade 137
F Install the tilt cylinder and strut 138
Fasten the seatbelt 77 Install the trunion 135
Felling trees 129 Interior cab lighting and reading light 83
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Field of vision 51 Intermittent wipe, continuous wipe or wash

Fill quantities, lubrication schedule 176 windows 85
Fill the duo cone (slipring) area with oil 285
Filter change 191
Fine grading 126 J
Fire extinguisher 87 Jump start procedure 157
Flush the duo cone (slipring) area 281
Fuel system 173, 234
Full speed range 104 N
Full speed range - Rocker switch position “III” 105 Notes for cleaning 306
Function of emergency operation 149 Notes for work on the fuel system 234

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 311
O Release the parking brake 111

Release the seatbelt 78
Observe the safety aspects 76 Removal 304
Oil analysis 190, 199 Remove and install a chain with a split master
Oil change 189 link 296
Oil change, oil analysis, filter change 189 Remove and install a sealed chain 299
Oil for axle bearing 193 Remove the cover plate on the lower right 203
Oil for duo cone (slipring) seal Travel gear 193 Remove the cover plates on the left 204
Oil for hinges and joints 195 Remove the covers 203
Open the engine compartment door and remove the Removing brush to medium sized trees 128
covers 202 Removing high shrubs and medium sized trees 128
Open the operator's cab door from the inside 70 Removing rootstocks 129
Open the right engine compartment door 202 Removing the main filter element 248
Operate the machine daily 88 Replace the fuel preliminary filter 235
Operate the window wiper and washer system 84 Replacing the air filter 248
Operating and control elements 54 Replacing the safety element 249
Operating problems 159 Ripper Remove and install the tooth tips 304
Operation 68, 88 Ripping 130
Operator's cab 54 Roll over protection (ROPS) and falling object
Operator's platform support sign 32 protection (FOPS) 50
Operator's platform - Tilt device sign 31 Rotating beacon 3) 87
Operator's seat 71
Operator's seat with mechanic suspension 71
Operator's seat with pneumatic suspension 73 S
Overall machine 172, 212 Safety guidelines 40
Safety guidelines, signs 25
P Safety guidelines for crushing and burn prevention
41
Parallel operation 127 Safety guidelines for fire and explosion prevention 41
Park the machine at temperatures below freezing Safety guidelines for loading the machine with a
111 crane 48
Preparatory maintenance tasks 200 Safety guidelines for machine start up 42
Prepare for transport 142, 146 Safety guidelines for maintenance 45
Preselect the speed ranges 103 Safety guidelines for maintenance work on machines
Preservation tasks 308 with hydro accumulators 49
Problem remedy 165 Safety guidelines for start up 42
Problems - Cause - Remedy 160 Safety guidelines for towing the machine 45
Product description 15 Safety guidelines for transporting the machine 44
Protection from vibrations 50 Safety guidelines for turning the machine off 44
Protect the piston rods 308 Safety guidelines for welding work on the machine
48
Q Safety guidelines for working 43
Safety guidelines for working on the attachment 48
Quality 191, 192 Safety instructions for maintenance 200
Safety lever sign 29
R Safety notes for maintenance of hydraulic hoses and
hose lines 48
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Raise and lower the ripper 123 Safety signs 27

Raise the working attachment 111 Seatbelt 76
Raising and lowering the dozer blade 117 Seatbelt sign 31
Rear winch operation 124 See and be seen 51
Recommended lubricants 176 Select the park position 115
Recommended service items 177 Self test of electronic system 102
Reference signs 32 Set the engine rpm 102
Refill the hydraulic oil 252 Set the timing for the intermittent wipe 85
Regulate the blower 80 Setting the cutting angle 121
Release the chain tension 295 Sign Chain tension 39
3) Optional

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
312 PR734-1481 / 13743
Operator's manual Index
Sign Coolant 38 Travel gear - Duo cone (slipring) seal area 279
Sign Emergency exit 37 Travel operation 101
Sign Lubrication chart 36 Travel speed fine adjustment 105
Sign MIN/MAX Hydraulic tank 34 Turning to the left 108
Sign Noise protection 35 Turning to the right 108
Sign Ripper 37 Turn the air conditioning system on 81
Sign Rops - Fops 33 Turn the battery master switch off 114, 201
Signs on the machine 26 Turn the battery master switch on 88
Sign Splash water 34 Turn the Diesel engine off 112
Sign Stop-lift point 36 Turn the electrical system off 204
Sign Travel hydraulics 35 Turn the heater on and off 79
Sign Window washer fluid 36 Type plates 39
Sign Working hydraulics 38
Sliding window 82
Software bleeding mode 245 U
Sound emission 18 Use of corrosion inhibitor without antifreeze fluid 229
Specification 180 Use of DCA 4 229
Speed ranges - basic setting 104 Use of other water-soluble corrosion inhibitors 229
Splitterbox 174, 197, 262 Use of the machine in low or high ambient
Starting preparations 96 temperatures 95
Starting preparations in freezing temperatures 101 Using several machines simultaneously 127
Start the Diesel engine 96, 99
Stay clear warning sign 28
Steering 107 V
Stop the machine 155 Viscosity 192, 193
Stop the travel drive 115
Stop the travel drive and continue with the emergency
off button 115 W
Warm up specification 188
Water (Fresh water) 183
T Wet cleaning the machine 306
Take oil samples 196 Whole body vibrations 17
Take the machine out of service 111 Wipe the window 84
Taking oil samples and oil analysis 196 Working attachment 175, 304
Taking the machine out of service 308 Working equipment 164
Technical data 17 Working in water 116
Technical description 15 Working with the attachment 117
Tension the chain 295 Work methods 125
Test procedure 229 Work with optional equipment 123
Tightening torque for cutting edges, end bits and
adapters 23
Tightening torques 19
Tightening torques for countersunk screws 21
Tightening torques for hex head screws 19
Tightening torques for sprocket segment bolts 289
Tightening torques for track pad bolts 289
Tightening torques for track pad bolts (re-check) 288
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en
Tilting dozer blade to the left 119

Tilting dozer blade to the right 120
Towing safety 149
Tow the machine 149, 150, 153
Track components 175, 288
Track tension sign 29
Transport 142
Transport the machine by truck or rail 142
Travel 107
Travel gear 198
Travel gear, tracks 163

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
PR734-1481 / 13743 313
LWT/9087118/05/01.10.2016/en

PR734-1482, PR734-1659,
314 PR734-1481 / 13743

Ma en

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ma en

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

en Operator's manual

Contact Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

Liability and warranty

Modifications, conditions, copyright

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

To: Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH

Ideas, comments (please state the page number):

Overall, how would you judge this document?

Your data: Machine / serial number:

Thank you for your help.

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

2 Safety guidelines, signs 25

2.4.2 Safety guidelines for crushing and burn prevention 41

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

2.4.8 Safety guidelines for transporting the machine 44

3.2.8 Heater, ventilation 78

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

3.2.14 Compartment for documentation 85

3.6.1 Transport the machine by truck or rail 142

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

4 Operating problems 159

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

5.5.3 Turn the electrical system off 204

5.9 Fuel system 234

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

5.9.7 Drain the fuel water separator condensation 246

5.15.3 Change the oil 278

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

5.16.4 Change the chain 296

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

1.1 Technical description

1.1.1 Design overview

Fig. 1: Overall machine - front view

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

Fig. 2: Overall view - rear view

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

1.2 Technical data

1.2.1 Information for vibration emission

Hand, arm and whole body vibration emission

Hand - arm vibrations

Whole body vibrations

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

The test uncertainty is defined in Standard EN 12096: 1997.

1.2.2 Sound emission

1.2.3 Maximum operating weight

copyright © Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH 2016

Engine: 150 kW / 204 HP

Operating Weight: 17,960 – 22,100 kg

Image shows XL undercarriage

Max. blade tilt mm 780 790 780 790 714

Image shows XL undercarriage

Mechanical without Tilt Function with Tilt Function2

Max. blade tilt. mm – 672

Electrical System Spill plate for blade +

Wide Product Range State-of-the-art Technology

Exceptional Customer Benefit Worldwide and Independent

RG-BK-RP LWT / VM 11822682-web-12.15_enGB

Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH

1.3 Tightening torques

Engine: 150 kW / 204 HP

Operating Weight: 17,960 – 22,100 kg